Ifm As-I Master AC1421

Device Manual
SmartSPS AC14
with EtherNet/IP interface
AC1421
AC1422
Master profile: M4
Firmware release: 3.1.2 or higher
English
2015-11-30
7391061_00_UK
ifm Device Manual SmartSPS AC14 with EtherNet/IP interface (AC1421, AC1422), Firmware 3.1.2 2015-11-30
Content
Contents
1 Preliminary note 5
1.1 Legal and copyright information ...........................................................................................6
1.2 Purpose of the document .....................................................................................................6
1.3 Symbols and formats used ..................................................................................................7
1.4 Overview: User documentation for AC14 ............................................................................8
1.5 Getting started......................................................................................................................8
1.6 Modification history ..............................................................................................................9
2 Safety instructions 10
2.1 Required background knowledge ......................................................................................11
2.2 Please note! .......................................................................................................................11
2.3 Tampering with the unit ......................................................................................................12
2.4 Start-up behaviour of the controller....................................................................................12
3 System description 13
3.1 Intended use ......................................................................................................................14
3.1.1 Permitted use ............................................................................................................................. 14
3.1.2 Prohibited use ............................................................................................................................ 14
3.2 Information concerning the device .....................................................................................15
3.2.1 Where is what on the AS-i device?............................................................................................. 16
3.2.2 Operating elements .................................................................................................................... 17
3.2.3 Display elements ........................................................................................................................ 17
3.2.4 CODESYS PLC .......................................................................................................................... 17
3.2.5 Interfaces.................................................................................................................................... 18
3.2.6 Required accessories ................................................................................................................. 18
4 Operation 19
4.1 Control of the graphical user interface ...............................................................................20
4.1.1 Function keys ............................................................................................................................. 21
4.1.2 Arrow keys.................................................................................................................................. 21
4.2 Menu view ..........................................................................................................................22
4.2.1 Menu navigation ......................................................................................................................... 22
4.2.2 Navigation aids ........................................................................................................................... 23
4.3 Page view...........................................................................................................................25
4.3.1 Navigate on a page .................................................................................................................... 25
4.3.2 Use navigation aids .................................................................................................................... 25
4.3.3 Description of the control elements ............................................................................................ 26
4.4 Remote access ..................................................................................................................39
4.4.1 General....................................................................................................................................... 40
4.4.2 Recommended browsers............................................................................................................ 40
4.4.3 Operating instructions ................................................................................................................ 41
5 Menu 44
5.1 Start screen ........................................................................................................................45
5.2 Quick setup ........................................................................................................................46
5.2.1 Quick setup: Project AS-i networks ............................................................................................ 47
5.2.2 Quick setup: Configure the operating mode of the AS-i masters ................................................ 48
5.2.3 Quick setup: Configure the output access .................................................................................. 49
5.2.4 Quick setup: Access the device via QR code ............................................................................. 49
5.2.5 Quick setup: Configure the EtherNet/IP interface ....................................................................... 50
2
Content
5.2.6 Quick setup: Set the configuration mode .................................................................................... 51

5.2.7 Quick setup: Set the configuration interface ............................................................................... 52
5.2.8 Quick setup: Address the AS-i slaves connected to AS-i master 1 ............................................ 54
5.2.9 Quick setup: Address the AS-i slaves connected to AS-i master 2 ............................................ 55
5.3 AS-i 1 / AS-i 2.....................................................................................................................56
5.3.1 AS-i 1 / AS-i 2: Master setup ...................................................................................................... 57
5.3.2 AS-i 1 / AS-i 2: Diagnosis ........................................................................................................... 59
5.3.3 AS-i 1 / AS-i 2: AS-i slaves ......................................................................................................... 61
5.4 System ...............................................................................................................................67
5.4.1 System: Programmable Logic Controller (PLC).......................................................................... 68
5.4.2 System: Information ................................................................................................................... 74
5.4.3 System: Setup ............................................................................................................................ 75
5.4.4 System: Diagnosis ...................................................................................................................... 87
5.5 Interfaces ...........................................................................................................................88
5.5.1 Interfaces: Configuration interface .............................................................................................. 89
5.5.2 Interfaces: EtherNet/IP interface ................................................................................................ 92
5.6 ifm system solutions .........................................................................................................104
5.6.1 Notes on ifm system solutions .................................................................................................. 105
5.6.2 Show information about installed ifm apps ............................................................................... 106
5.6.3 Install single/basic app ............................................................................................................. 107
5.6.4 Install multi app ........................................................................................................................ 108
5.6.5 Update ifm apps ....................................................................................................................... 109
5.6.6 Uninstall ifm apps ..................................................................................................................... 109
6 Setup 110
6.1 Connect the device ..........................................................................................................111
6.1.1 EtherNet/IP interface ................................................................................................................ 111
6.1.2 Configuration interface ............................................................................................................. 111
6.2 Start screen 'Basic settings' .............................................................................................111
6.2.1 Change the basic settings of the device ................................................................................... 112
6.3 Update the firmware of the device ...................................................................................114
6.3.1 Behaviour of the settings upon firmware update ...................................................................... 114
6.3.2 Firmware update from SD card ................................................................................................ 115
6.3.3 Firmware update via the web interface ..................................................................................... 116
6.4 Connect and address AS-i slaves ....................................................................................118
6.5 Setup of EtherNet/IP ........................................................................................................118
6.6 Setup of the configuration interface .................................................................................118
6.7 Exchange AS-i slave ........................................................................................................119
7 Troubleshooting 120
7.1 Status LED .......................................................................................................................121
7.1.1 Status LED: Basic device ......................................................................................................... 121
7.1.2 Status LED: fieldbus EtherNet/IP ............................................................................................. 121
7.2 Online diagnosis function .................................................................................................122
7.2.1 Message types ......................................................................................................................... 122
7.2.2 Locate error sources ................................................................................................................ 122
7.3 Online Support Center (OSC) ..........................................................................................123
7.3.1 OSC: View current error messages .......................................................................................... 124
7.3.2 OSC: Show message history.................................................................................................... 125
8 Appendix 126
8.1 Approval tests / certifications ...........................................................................................127
8.2 Technical data ..................................................................................................................128
8.2.1 Housing .................................................................................................................................... 129
8.2.2 Display elements ...................................................................................................................... 129
8.2.3 Operation.................................................................................................................................. 129
8.2.4 Power supply connections ........................................................................................................ 129
8.2.5 Interfaces.................................................................................................................................. 130
3
Content
8.2.6 Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) ..................................................................................... 131

8.3 Address assignment in Ethernet networks ......................................................................132
8.4 Configuration interface: connection concepts ..................................................................133
8.4.1 Direct link.................................................................................................................................. 134
8.4.2 Connection via Ethernet network .............................................................................................. 135
8.5 AS-i master ......................................................................................................................136
8.5.1 Operating modes of the AS-i master ........................................................................................ 137
8.5.2 Master flags .............................................................................................................................. 139
8.6 AS-i slaves .......................................................................................................................144
8.6.1 Profiles of AS-i slaves............................................................................................................... 145
8.7 Fieldbus EtherNet/IP ........................................................................................................155
8.7.1 Fieldbus objects ....................................................................................................................... 156
8.7.2 Fieldbus parameters ................................................................................................................. 158
8.7.3 Device-specific parameters ...................................................................................................... 159
8.7.4 Cyclic data ................................................................................................................................ 181
8.7.5 Acyclic data .............................................................................................................................. 217
8.7.6 Configuration mode .................................................................................................................. 335
8.8 OSC messages ................................................................................................................345
8.8.1 OSC messages: System .......................................................................................................... 346
8.8.2 OSC messages: AS-i 1 / AS-i 2 ................................................................................................ 347
8.9 Information on AS-i ..........................................................................................................348
9 Glossary of Terms 349
10 Index 360
11 ifm weltweit • ifm worldwide • ifm à l’échelle internationale 365
4
Preliminary note Legal and copyright information
1 Preliminary note
Legal and copyright information ...............................................................................................................6

Purpose of the document .........................................................................................................................6
Symbols and formats used .......................................................................................................................7
Overview: User documentation for AC14 .................................................................................................8
Getting started ..........................................................................................................................................8
Modification history ...................................................................................................................................9
6919
5
Preliminary note Legal and copyright information
>
1.1 Legal and copyright information

6088
© All rights reserved by ifm electronic gmbh. No part of this manual may be reproduced and used
without the consent of ifm electronic gmbh.
All product names, pictures, companies or other brands used on our pages are the property of the respective rights owners:
• AS-i is the property of the AS-International Association, (→ www.as-interface.net)
• CAN is the property of the CiA (CAN in Automation e.V.), Germany (→ www.can-cia.org)
• CODESYS™ is the property of the 3S – Smart Software Solutions GmbH, Germany (→ www.codesys.com)
• DeviceNet™ is the property of the ODVA™ (Open DeviceNet Vendor Association), USA (→ www.odva.org)
• EtherNet/IP® is the property of the →ODVA™
• IO-Link® (→ www.io-link.com) is the property of the →PROFIBUS Nutzerorganisation e.V., Germany
• Microsoft® is the property of the Microsoft Corporation, USA (→ www.microsoft.com)
• PROFIBUS® is the property of the PROFIBUS Nutzerorganisation e.V., Germany (→ www.profibus.com)
• PROFINET® is the property of the →PROFIBUS Nutzerorganisation e.V., Germany
• Windows® is the property of the →Microsoft Corporation, USA
>
1.2 Purpose of the document

12104
This document applies to devices of the type "Smart PLC AC14 with EtherNet/IP interface" (art. no.:
AC1421/AC1422) as from firmware version 3.1.2.
These instructions describe the following topics:
 Operation and configuration of the device via the menu (GUI and web interface)
 Command channels, cyclic and acyclic data records
 Fault diagnostics and troubleshooting
6
Preliminary note Symbols and formats used
>
1.3 Symbols and formats used

15989
WARNING
Death or serious irreversible injuries may result.
CAUTION
Slight reversible injuries may result.
NOTICE
Property damage is to be expected or may result.
Important note
Non-compliance can result in malfunction or interference
Information
Supplementary note
► ... Request for action
> ... Reaction, result
→ ... "see"
abc Cross-reference
123 Decimal number
0x123 Hexadecimal number
0b010 Binary number
[...] Designation of pushbuttons, buttons or indications
7
Preliminary note Overview: User documentation for AC14
>
1.4 Overview: User documentation for AC14

6998
ifm electronic provides the following user documentation for the models of the device class "Smart
PLC AC14":
Document Content / description
Data sheet Technical data of AC142n as a table

Operating instructions *  Notes on mounting and electrical installation of AC142n
 Setup, description of the operating and display elements, maintenance information, scale
drawing
Device manual  Notes on operation of AC142n via GUI and web interface
 Description of the cyclic and acyclic data records, fieldbus parameters and command interface
 Fault description
Programming manual  Notes on configuration of a AC142n system in CODESYS
 Notes on programming of the PLC of AC142n
 Description of the device-specific CODESYS function libraries
Legend:
*... The operating instructions are supplied with the device.
All documents can be downloaded from ifm's website.

→ www.ifm.com > Select country > [Data sheet search] > (Article no.) > [Operating
instructions]
>
1.5 Getting started

6922
Mounting instructions and notes on the electrical installation of the device can be found in the supplied
operating instructions. If you misplace your instructions, you can download them from the ifm website:
→ www.ifm.com > Select country > [Data sheet search] > (Article no.) > [Operating instructions]
Familiarise yourself with the graphical user interface (→ Operation (→ page 19))!
The menu functions of the graphical user interface are described in the chapter → Menu (→ page 44).
For information regarding the setup of the device following installation and electrical connection please
refer to chapter → Setup (→ page 110).
For information about the programming of the device-internal PLC with CODESYS, please refer to the
programming manual:
→ www.ifm.com > Select country > [Data sheet search] > (Article no.) > [Operating instructions]
8
Preliminary note Modification history
>
1.6 Modification history

7080
Version Topic Date

1.0 New creation of the document 24/10/2014
2.0 New functions provided by firmware 3.1.2 30/11/2015

 ifm system solutions
 Diagnostic protocol
 Access to OSC from the start screen
 Description of cyclic fieldbus data
 Description of acyclic fieldbus data (command interface)
9
Safety instructions Modification history
2 Safety instructions
Required background knowledge ...........................................................................................................11

Please note! ............................................................................................................................................11
Tampering with the unit ..........................................................................................................................12
Start-up behaviour of the controller ........................................................................................................12
213
10
Safety instructions Required background knowledge
>
2.1 Required background knowledge

13323
This document is intended for people with knowledge of control technology and PLC programming
with IEC 61131-3.
To program the PLC, the people should also be familiar with the CODESYS software.
This document is intended for specialists. Specialists are people who, based on their relevant training
and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards that may be caused
during operation or maintenance of the product. The document contains information about the correct
handling of the product.
► Read this document before use to familiarise yourself with operating conditions, installation and
operation. Keep this document during the entire duration of use of the device.
► Follow the safety instructions.
>
2.2 Please note!

6091
11212
No characteristics are warranted with the information, notes and examples provided in this manual.
With the drawings, representations and examples given no responsibility for the system is assumed
and no application-specific particularities are taken into account.
► The manufacturer of the machine/equipment is responsible for ensuring the safety of the
machine/equipment.
► Follow the national and international regulations of the country in which the machine/installation is
to be placed on the market!
WARNING
Non-observance of these instructions can lead to property damage or personal injury!
ifm electronic gmbh does not assume any liability in this regard.
► The acting person must have read and understood the safety instructions and the corresponding
chapters in this manual before working on and with this device.
► The acting person must be authorised to work on the machine/equipment.
► The acting person must have the qualifications and training required to perform this work.
► Adhere to the technical data of the devices!
You can find the current data sheet on ifm's homepage at:
→ www.ifm.com > Select your country > [Data sheet search] > (article number.) > [Technical data
in PDF format]
► Note the installation and wiring information as well as the functions and features of the devices!
→ supplied installation instructions or on ifm's homepage:
→ www.ifm.com > Select your country > [Data sheet search] > (article number.) > [Operating
instructions]
► Please note the corrections and notes in the release notes for the existing documentation,
available on the ifm website:
→ www.ifm.com > Select your country > [Data sheet search] > (article number.) > [Operating
instructions]
11
Safety instructions Tampering with the unit
>
2.3 Tampering with the unit

11242
WARNING
Tampering with the units can affect the safety of operators and machinery!
Tampering with the units is not allowed.
In case of non-compliance our liability and warranty expire.
► Do not open the devices!
► Do not insert any objects into the devices!
► Prevent metal foreign bodies from penetrating!
>
2.4 Start-up behaviour of the controller

6827
15233
11575
WARNING
Danger due to unintentional and dangerous start of machine or plant sections!
► When creating the program, the programmer must ensure that no unintentional and dangerous
start of machines or plant sections after a fault (e.g. e-stop) and the following fault elimination can
occur!
 Realise restart inhibit!
► In case of an error, set the outputs concerned to FALSE in the program!
A restart can, for example, be caused by:

• voltage restoration after power failure
• reset after watchdog response because of too long a cycle time
• error elimination after an E-stop
To ensure a safe behaviour of the controller:
► monitor the voltage supply in the application program.
► In case of an error switch off all relevant outputs in the application program.
► Monitor actuators which can cause hazardous movements in the application program (feedback).
► Monitor relay contacts which can cause hazardous movements in the application program
(feedback).
► If necessary, ensure that welded relay contacts in the application project cannot trigger or continue
hazardous movements.
12
System description Start-up behaviour of the controller
3 System description
Intended use ...........................................................................................................................................14

Information concerning the device .........................................................................................................15
975
13
System description Intended use
>
3.1 Intended use

5310
NOTICE
Danger when device is overloaded or incorrectly used.
The device and / or the associated machine / plant may be damaged or destroyed or may malfunction
if the limits of the "Technical data" for this device are exceeded or if the device is used outside the
specified "Intended use".
► Use the device only within the limits of the Technical data (→ page 128) ( data sheet).
► Use the device only in accordance with the "Intended use".
>
3.1.1 Permitted use

12109
You may use the device for the following purposes (= intended use):
 as a gateway between the AS-i network and a higher-level controller (EtherNet/IP controller =
host; e.g. PLC) via the fieldbus interface EtherNet/IP.
 as Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) for program-based parameter setting and control of the
AS-i slaves connected to the device.
The device provides the following features:
 The SmartPLC with EtherNet/IP interface integrates the following components:
– AC1421: 1 AS-i master
– AC1422: 2 AS-i masters
– a Programmable Logic Controller (PLC)
– a web server
– a EtherNet/IP interface with 2-port switch
– an EtherNet configuration interface
 It controls the exchange of data to the sensor/actuator level.
 It communicates with the superior control level via EtherNet/IP.
 It visualises sensor/actuator data on the integrated web server.
 It allows the configuration of the device via the web server.
>
3.1.2 Prohibited use

5320
In the following areas you must NOT use the device:

 outdoors,
 in wet environments,
beyond the limits of the technical data ( data sheet).
14
System description Information concerning the device
>
3.2 Information concerning the device
Where is what on the AS-i device? ........................................................................................................16

Operating elements ................................................................................................................................17
Display elements ....................................................................................................................................17
CODESYS PLC ......................................................................................................................................17
Interfaces ................................................................................................................................................18
Required accessories .............................................................................................................................18
5330
15
>
3.2.1 Where is what on the AS-i device?

12112
Legend:
Display
Status LED (H1)
2 function keys
4 arrow keys
Connector (X1) for

AS-i 1, AS-i 2, functional earth
Connector (X2) for AUX
(here with AUX jumper)
Front flap
Slot for SD card

(behind the front flap)
EtherNet configuration interface (X3)
(behind the front flap)
EtherNet/IP interface 2 (X6) with
status LED (H2, H3)
EtherNet/IP interface 1 (X7) with
status LED (H4, H5)
16
>
3.2.2 Operating elements

15840
The device provides the following operating elements.

>
Arrow and function keys

15867
Below the display is the key panel with two function keys and four arrow keys. The operator controls
the Graphical User Interface (GUI) of the device with the keys.
Technical data: → Operation (→ page 129)
>
3.2.3 Display elements

7062
The device provides the following display elements:

>
Display
7083
The display is used to display the Graphical User Interface (GUI) of the device.
Operating notes: → Operation (→ page 19)
Technical data: → Display elements (→ page 129)
>
Status LEDs
18985
The device features the following status LEDs which display the current status of system components.
Meaning of the LED colours and flashing frequencies: → Status LED (→ page 121)
>
3.2.4 CODESYS PLC

7095
The device features a Programmable Logic Controller (PLC). The PLC can run applications (apps) that
have been created with the IEC 61131-3 compliant programming software "CODESYS Development
System" (from version 3.5 SP4 patch 2).
Technical data: → Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) (→ page 131)
For information about the programming of the device-internal PLC with CODESYS, please
refer to the programming manual:
instructions]
17
>
3.2.5 Interfaces
15839
The device provides the following interfaces:

>
Ethernet configuration interface

6982
The configuration interface (X3) is located behind the front flap of the device. It allows the user to
access the following device functions:
 web interface for device configuration and diagnosis
 programming of the device-internal PLC using CODESYS
 Configuration as fieldbus interface
Possible network topologies: → Configuration interface: connection concepts (→ page 133)

Technical data: → Interfaces (→ page 130)
>
EtherNet/IP fieldbus interface

12113
The device communicates with the higher-level control instance of the EtherNet/IP network via the
EtherNet/IP interface (X6/X7).
 Notes regarding connetion concepts: → Configuration interface: connection concepts (→ page 133)
 Technical data: → Interfaces (→ page 130)
>
SD card slot
9135
The SD card slot (X5) is located behind the front flap of the device. The following actions can be
performed with an SD card:
 update the firmware of the device
 save/restore the device configuration
Technical data: → Interfaces (→ page 130)

>
3.2.6 Required accessories

6926
To be able to operate the device in a sensible way you need the following accessories (not supplied
with the device):
 Depending on the selected voltage supply ( Operating instructions) you need:
 a power supply for the 24 V power supply (e.g. art. no. DN3011)
 for each AS-i master one AS-i power supply each (e.g. art. no. AC1236)
 a data decoupling module AC1250 (accessory, optional)
 AS-i slaves.
18
Operation Information concerning the device
4 Operation
Control of the graphical user interface ...................................................................................................20

Menu view...............................................................................................................................................22
Page view ...............................................................................................................................................25
Remote access .......................................................................................................................................39
14805
19
Operation Control of the graphical user interface
>
4.1 Control of the graphical user interface

6930
Below the display is the key panel with six membrane keys. The operator controls the graphical user
interface of the device with these keys. The key panel is closely linked to the navigation status bar.
Legend:
Label left function key
Navigation compass
Label right function key
Right function key
Left function key
Arrow key []
Arrow key []
Arrow key []
Arrow key []
20
Operation Control of the graphical user interface
>
4.1.1 Function keys

7090
The two function keys allow the operator to trigger specified

actions (e.g. tick a checkbox). The function of the function
keys changes depending on the context.
The two text fields in the navigation status bar are
associated with the function keys located directly below the
display. They indicate the action that will be triggered if the
function key is pressed in the current work step. If the function
key is not labelled, it means that it has no function in the
present situation.
Example (→ figure):
► The left function key triggers the action [Select].
► The right function key triggers the action [Back].
>
4.1.2 Arrow keys

7091
The fourarrow keys [],[], [] and [] can be used for
navigation and selection.
The navigation compass shows which of the four arrow keys
can be used in the respective work step.
Examples:
All arrow keys are active and will trigger a device
response when pressed.
Only the arrow keys [] and [] are active and will
trigger a device response when pressed.
21
Operation Menu view
>
4.2 Menu view

6996
The menu view allows the user to select the menu page with the required control or display function.
Legend:
Info bar
Main navigation bar
Subnavigation bar 1
Subnavigation bar 2
Selected menu item (focus)
Navigation status bar with

- labelling of the function keys
- navigation compass
Long texts are displayed as scrolling text in the info bar.
>
4.2.1 Menu navigation

10967
The central operating elements in the menu view are the three navigation bars. They reflect the
menu structure of the device software. Each navigation bar represents a menu level. The symbols in a
navigation bar represent the submenus and menu items.
Rules for menu navigation:
► Use []/[] to navigate within a menu level.
> The selected symbol has the focus (= orange frame).
> If the selected symbol has a submenu, the corresponding subnavigation bar will automatically
appear.
► Use [] to go one menu level down.
► Use [] to go one menu level up.
At the lowest menu level:
► Press [Select] function key to go to the page of the selected menu item (→ Page view
(→ page 25)).
In the main navigation bar:
► Press [Back] function key to return to the start screen (→ Start screen (→ page 45)).
22
Operation Menu view
>
4.2.2 Navigation aids

15830
The following screen elements help you navigate through the menu:
> The info bar shows the navigation path of the selected menu symbol.
> The navigation compass shows which navigation steps are possible from the current position.
Legend:
Info bar
Navigation path to the focused menu element:

[System] > [PLC] > [Setup]
Menu element with focus
Navigation path to the focused menu element:
> >
23
Operation Menu view
>
Example
11770
To access the menu page containing the setting options for the device-internal PLC:
1. > Initial position when accessing the menu screen
2. ► Use [] to select the [System] menu symbol.

> The focus is on the [System] menu symbol.
> The first subnavigation bar appears.
3. ► Use [] to change to the first subnavigation barh.

> The focus is on the [Diagnosis] menu symbol.
4. ► Use [] to select the [PLC] menu symbol.

> The focus is on the [PLC] menu symbol.
> The second subnavigation bar appears.
5. ► Use [] to change to the second subnavigation bar.

> The focus is on the [Information] menu symbol.
6. ► Use [] to select the [Setup] menu symbol.

> The focus is on the [Setup] menu symbol.
► Press the [Select] function key to go to the page view
of the [Setup] menu item.
> The page shows the setting options for the
device-internal PLC.
24
Operation Page view
>
4.3 Page view

7959
The page view allows the user to select and execute a requested function.
Legend:
Info bar
Main navigation bar
Page
Scroll bar
Tab menu
Page element with focus
Navigation status bar with

- labelling of function keys
- navigation compass
>
4.3.1 Navigate on a page

15831
The page contains elements, that allow the operator to control the device or access information.
For page navigation, the following basic rules apply:
► Use the arrow keys []/[] to change between the different page elements.
> The selected element is marked (= orange frame).
► Use the [Back] function key to return to the tab menu / menu view.
Rules for using the different control elements: → Description of the control elements (→ page 26)
>
4.3.2 Use navigation aids

14838
The following aids offer navigation users additional orientation:

> The info bar shows detailed information about the selected element (focus).
Long texts are displayed as scrolling text in the info bar.
> The active menu symbol in the main navigation bar has a dark background.
> A scroll bar appears on the right side of the screen if the elements do not fit on the page.
> The navigation compass shows the navigation options in the active work step.
> The text fields in the navigation status bar show the current assignment of the function keys.
25
Operation Page view
>
4.3.3 Description of the control elements
Tab menu/Tab ........................................................................................................................................27

Button .....................................................................................................................................................28
Checkbox ................................................................................................................................................28
List ..........................................................................................................................................................29
Slave selector .........................................................................................................................................30
Confirmation message............................................................................................................................35
Numerical field ........................................................................................................................................36
Binary field ..............................................................................................................................................38
7013
A page consists of different control elements.
26
Operation Page view
>
Tab menu/Tab
8737
A tab menu groups together the different functions of a menu page. A tab menu consists of at least
two tabs. A tab combines related functions.
Example:
> The focused tab has an orange background
> The info bar displays the name of the active tab (in this
example: Errors / slave).
> The symbols and indicate that there are more tabs on
the left and right sides of the visible tab.
> The page shows the control elements that belong to the
currently selected tab.
Tabs can have the following background colours:
= Tab has the focus
= Tab is active
= Tab is inactive
Use:
1 Select the menu item
► Go to the menu item with the tab menu.
> The tab menu appears.
> The focus is on the left-hand tab.
2 Select a tab
► Use [] / [] arrow key to select the desired tab.
> The focus (orange background) moves to the selected tab:
> The page shows the functions of the selected tab.

3 Activate the menu page
► Press [Select] function key to go to the page that belongs to the active tab.
> When going to the page, the tab menu remains visible.
> The background colour of the active tab turns grey.
4 Carry out the desired functions

► Use [] to select and execute the desired function.
5 Change to tab menu
► Press [Back] function key to change to the tab menu.
> The focus (orange background) moves to the active tab.
27
Operation Page view
>
Button
14196
A button allows the operator to carry out a specified action once. The caption on the button describes
the action.
Example:
Use:
1 Select a button
► Use the arrow keys [] / [] to select a button.
> The selected button gets an orange frame:
2 Activate the button

► Use [Select] function key to activate the selected button.
> The function is executed.
>
Checkbox
7038
A checkbox permits the user to activate/deactivate a parameter. A checkbox control element consists
of a checkbox and a caption.
Example:
Use:
1 Select a checkbox
► Use arrow key [] / [] to select the checkbox
> The focus (orange frame) moves to the selected checkbox
OR:
2 Check/uncheck a checkbox
► Use function key [Select] to check/uncheck the selected checkbox.
> The status change is indicated:
= checkbox is checked
OR:
= checkbox is unchecked
The setting or clearing of a checkbox is not always immediately effective. Often the change
must be confirmed by clicking a button (e.g. [Accept selection])!
28
Operation Page view
>
List
7042
A list provides a set of defined values. The operator can select precisely one value from this set (= 1 of
n selection).
Examples:
= list without caption
= list with caption
Use:
1 Select a list
► Use arrow key [] / [] to select the list.
> The focus (orange frame) moves to the selected list.
> The list shows the active value: (in this exampleGateway).
2 Activate the list
► Use function key [Select] to open the list.
> The opened list shows the selectable values.
3 Select a value
► Use arrow key [] / [] to select the desired value from the list.
> The background colour of the selected value turns orange.
4 Apply the selected value

► Use function key [Select] to apply the selected value.
OR:
Use function key [Back] to quit and close the list.
> The list shows the selected value.
The set value will not always become effective immediately. Often the change must be
confirmed by clicking a button (e.g. [Accept selection])!
29
Operation Page view
>
Slave selector
Overview of slave states.........................................................................................................................31

Overview of free slave addresses ..........................................................................................................33
7018
The slave selector is used to select an AS-i slave or an AS-i address.
Legend:
Indicator of AS-i master operating mode
AS-i address symbol
Highlighted AS-i address (focus)
Status message of highlighted AS-i address
> The status LED indicates the active operating mode of the AS-i master:
= AS-i master in protected mode
= AS-i master in projection mode
> Every field represents an AS-i address. An AS-i address can be occupied by:
– a single slave symbol
– an A/B slave pair symbol
> The row and column headers help to locate the AS-i address.
Example: address of the field selected in the picture

– row header: 1x (= tens digit of the AS-i address)
– column header: 8 (= units digit of the AS-i address)
– type of slave: single slave (= symbol fully occupies the address field)
– resulting AS-i address: 18
> The symbol of the A/B slave pair appears when an A or B slave is used on this address.
The slave selector is used in the following overviews:

 Overview of slave states (→ Overview of slave states (→ page 31))
 Overview of free slave addresses (→ Overview of free slave addresses (→ page 33))
30
Operation Page view
>
Overview of slave states

6992
> The slave selector shows an overview of the slaves in the

selected AS-i network.
> The symbol colour signals the slave status. Meaning of
symbols and colours:
→ Slave status: colour code + symbols (→ page 31)
> The text field displays the status of the selected AS-i slave.
Possible status messages:
- Slave active
- Not projected (= configuration error)
- Double address (= double address error)
- Periphery (= periphery fault)
Use:
1 Select an AS-i slave
► Use the arrow keys [], [], [] and [] to select the desired AS-i slave.
> The focus (= orange frame) is on the selected AS-i slave.
> The info bar shows the address of the selected AS-i slave.
> The text field shows a status message about the selected AS-i slave.
2 Activate the selected AS-i slave
► Use function key [Select] to activate the selected AS-i slave and go to the next menu page.
OR:
Use function key [Back] to cancel and leave the slave selector.
>
Slave status: colour code + symbols

11236
Single slave A/B slave Colour Meaning
grey No slave found:

slave address is neither in the LPS nor in the LDS
green Slave is activated ( in LAS)
red Configuration error type 1:

– slave is projected (in LPS) but was not found (in LDS)
yellow Slave signals a peripheral fault
pink Several slaves have the same address (double address error)
grey red Configuration error type 2:

– the found slave (in LDS) is not projected (in LPS)
– the found slave has another profile than projected
31
Operation Page view
>
Meaning of the colour combinations (example: configuration error type 2)

11237
Symbol Colour Meaning

grey – Single slave is projected (in LPS) but was not found (in LDS).
– Instead, a new A slave with the same address was installed.
grey Configuration error type 2:
grey red – Single slave is projected (in LPS) but was not found (in LDS).
– Instead, a new B slave with the same address was installed.
– A or B slave is projected (in LPS) but was not found (in LDS).
– Instead, a new single slave with the same address was installed.
32
Operation Page view
>
Overview of free slave addresses

6993
In this overview, the slave selector shows the free and occupied AS-i addresses.
> The symbol colour indicates the state of the AS-i address.
Meaning of symbols and colours:
→ Free slave addresses: colour code + symbols (→ page 33)
> The text field displays the status of the selected AS-i slave.
Possible status messages:
- Free
- Missing slave
Use:
1 Select the AS-i address
► Use the arrow keys [], [], [] and [] to select the desired AS-i address.
> The focus (= orange frame) is on the selected AS-i address.
> The info bar displays the selected AS-i address.
> The text field shows a status message for the selected AS-i address.
2 Activate the selected AS-i address
► Use [Select] function key to activate the selected AS-i address and go to the next menu page.
OR:
Use [Back] function key to cancel and leave the slave selector.
>
Free slave addresses: colour code + symbols

11239
Single slave A/B slave Colour Meaning Prio.

grey Slave address is already used. --
turquoise Address is free according to LDS (= no slave found), however: 1

address already belongs to a stored projection (= application
profile).
blue Address is free according to LDS (= no slave found). 2
Address is not used in a stored projection (= application profile).
33
Operation Page view
>
Meaning of the colour combinations

11240
Symbol Colour Meaning
blue Slave to be addressed is an A/B slave:

blue A and B addresses are free.

grey – A address is free.
– B address is used.
grey Slave to be addressed is an A/B slave:
blue – Address is used.
– B address is free.
turquoise Slave to be addressed is an A/B slave:
turquoise A and B addresses are free, but already used in a stored projection.

grey – Address is free, but already used in a stored projection.
– B address is used.
grey Slave to be addressed is an A/B slave:
turquoise – Address is used.
– Address is free, but already used in a stored projection.
blue – Address is free, but already used in a stored projection.
– B address is free.
turquoise – A address is free
– Address is free, but already used in a stored projection.
34
Operation Page view
>
Confirmation message
7033
The confirmation message is a security prompt. It appears when important changes are made to the
system settings. The confirmation message shows the changes made. For the changes to become
effective, they first need to be acknowledged by the operator.
Example:
> Action: Change AS-i slave address from 1a to 1b
> Confirmation message shows:
– Action (= Change AS-i address)
– Slave address prior to change
– Slave address after change
> The operator has the following input options:
– function key [Select]
– function key [Back]
Use:
1 Change the settings
► Change the system settings.
> The confirmation message appears.
2 Confirm the message
► Use function key [Select] to confirm the changes and apply the new value.
OR:
Use function key [Back] to reject the changes and continue to use the old value.
> The page displays the valid settings.
35
Operation Page view
>
Numerical field
7046
The numerical field allows the operator to enter integer values. The value range is context-specific.
Numerical fields are part of the following GUI elements:
Control element Example Meaning

IP address Entry of an IP address (IPv4) in [w.x.y.z] format
– w | x | y | z = network segments (value range: 0... 255)
Date Date entry in [yyyy-mm-ss] format

– yyyy = year (value range: 0000 ... 9999)
– mm = month (value range: 01 ... 12)
– dd = day (value range: 01 ... 31)
Time Time entry in [hh:mm:ss] format

– hh = hours (value range: 00 ... 12)
– mm = minutes (value range: 00 .... 59)
– ss = seconds (value range: 00 ... 59)
The numerical field for seconds (ss) cannot be
edited!
Analogue value Entry of an analogue output value
Value range (per numerical field): 0 ... 9
Use (using the example of the numerical date field):

1 Select a numerical field
► Use arrow key [] / [] to select the date control element.
> The focus (= orange frame) is on the selected date control element.
> The date control element displays the current date

2 Activate the editing mode
► Press function key [Select] to enter the editing mode.
> The focus (orange frame) is on the right element
3 Set the desired value

► Use arrow key [] / [] to increment the desired value.
> The segment displays the new value.
Press and hold the arrow key [] / [] to rapidly move through larger value ranges.
4 Select the next segment

► Use the arrow key [] / [] to mark the segment to be edited.
> The focus (orange frame) moves to the marked segment
► Optional: Repeat steps 3 and 4 until all segments have the desired values.
36
Operation Page view
5 Adopt the set values

► Use [Select] function key to confirm the set values and to leave the edit mode.
OR:
Use [Back] function key to reset the set values and to leave the edit mode.
> The date control element displays the valid date
The set value will not always become effective immediately. Often the change must be
confirmed by clicking a button (e.g. [Accept selection])!
37
Operation Page view
>
Binary field
7047
The binary field allows the operator to change a digital value bit-wise.
Example:
> Display of the 4-bit digital value:
 Binary representation
= bit is on (= 1).
= bit is off (= 0).
 Hexadecimal representation:
0xf = 1111
Use:
1 Select the binary field
► Use [] / [] arrow keyt o select the binary field.
> The focus (orange frame) is on the selected binary field.
> The control element shows the current value (digital and hexadecimal).
2 Activate the editing mode
► Press [Select] function key to enter the editing mode.
> The focus (orange frame) is on the right element.
3 Set the desired value

► Use [] / [] arrow key to set the desired value.
> The control element shows the new value in digital and hexadecimal format.
4 Select the next segment
► Use [] / [] arrow key to mark the segment to be edited.
> The focus (orange frame) is on the selected segment.
► Optional: Repeat steps 3 and 4 until all segments have the desired values.
5 Apply the set values
► Use [Select] function key to confirm the set values and to leave the edit mode.
OR:
Use [Back] function key to reset the set values and to leave the edit mode.
> The binary field displays the current value (binary and hexadecimal).
38
Operation Remote access
>
4.4 Remote access
General ...................................................................................................................................................40
Recommended browsers........................................................................................................................40
Operating instructions .............................................................................................................................41
7068
The device has an integrated web server. It generates a web interface which allows remote access to
all device functions via an web browser. The web-interface allows the operator to easily configure,
parameterise and monitor the device in permanent operation via an ethernet-based network.
39
>
4.4.1 General
7069
The operating concept of the web interface follows the same philosophy as the operating concept of
the local display. The web interface uses the same menu items, the same menu structure and the
same symbols as the graphic user interface of the local display.
>
Additional functions
14181
The web interface provides the following extra features compared to the user interface of the display:
 Download Electronic Data Sheet (EDS)
(→ Download the device and I/O description (→ page 95))
 Download I/O description
(→ Download the device and I/O description (→ page 95))
 Adopt date and time settings of the PC/laptop
(→ Adopt the system time of the PC (→ page 83))
 Save diagnostics protocol
(→ Store diagnostic protocol (→ page 86))
 Use ifm system solutions
(→ ifm-Systemlösungen (→ page 104))
>
4.4.2 Recommended browsers

7070
Use one of the following Internet browsers to correctly display the HTML pages of the web interface:
 Microsoft Internet Explorer (from version 8.0)
 Mozilla Firefox (from version 3.5)
40
>
4.4.3 Operating instructions

Web interface: Access
10283
► PC / Laptop / mobile device: Start Internet browser.

► Internet browser: Enter IP address of the device in the address line
(e.g. 192.168.82.2)
> Internet browser displays the start page of the web interface.
>
Web interface: navigation

14193
In the web interface, the pointing device (e.g. mouse, touchpad) is used instead of the following key
functions:
 Navigation functions of the arrow keys [], [], [], []
 Selecting functiions of the function keys [Select] and [Back]
Example:
To select > :
► Place the cursor on symbol [AS-i 1] in the main
navigation bar.
> symbol [AS-i 1] has the focus.
> Subnavigation bar appears.
> Navigation trail shows actual position in the menu tree:
AS-i 1
► Place the cursor on symbol [Diagnosis] in the

subnavigation bar.
> symbol [Diagnosis] has the focus.
> Navigation trail shows actual position in the menu tree:
AS-i 1 > Diagnosis
► Click on symbol [Diagnosis]

> Web browser shows menu page [Diagnosis]
41
>
Web interface: Password protection

14187
The web server has a basic password protection to prevent unwanted or unauthorised changes to the
device settings via the web interface.
When the web interface is accessed, a status bar at the top shows if the user is logged in or logged
out:
User is logged in:
- Full access to device settings
- Full access to diagnostics and information data
User is logged out:
- No access to device settings
- Access to diagnostics and information data
The password is: CAFE

The password protection cannot be deactivated!
The password cannot be changed!
>
Web interface login

14221
► Go to the web interface (→ Operating instructions (→ page 41)).

> At the top of the web interface, the status bar displays the following status message:
► Enter the fixed password in the [Password:] field.

► Click [Login] to log in to the web interface.
> The status bar displays the changed status:
> The operator has unlimited access to all menus and functions of the web interface.
The operator remains logged in if one of the following actions is carried out:
 the web browser is closed and reopened
 the PC/laptop is restarted
 AC142n is restarted
To prevent unauthorised access to the device settings:

► Manually log off before you leave the web interface! (→ Disconnect from web interface (→ page 43))
► Remember to turn off the "Save password" function of your web browser before accessing the web interface!
► If the "Save password" function of your web browser is not turned off: delete the stored passwords in your
browser settings!
42
>
Disconnect from web interface

14276
To log out of the web interface:

► Start web interface
> Status line with status message is displayed at the top of the web interface:
► Log out of the web interface by clicking [Logout]

> Status bar shows changed status
> User can only access menus in the web interface containing diagnostic and information data.
> An error message is displayed when a user in the web interface accesses a menu with device
settings.
The user stays logged into the web interface even when the web browser is closed and then
restarted.
To prevent unauthorised access to the device settings:
► After finishing the access via the web browser manually log out of the device web interface!
► When passwort memory function of the web browser is not deactivated: Delete all saved
passwords in the browser settings!
43
Menu Remote access
5 Menu
Start screen ............................................................................................................................................45

Quick setup .............................................................................................................................................46
AS-i 1 / AS-i 2 .........................................................................................................................................56
System ....................................................................................................................................................67
Interfaces ................................................................................................................................................88
ifm system solutions .............................................................................................................................104
18788
This chapter describes the menu functions of the device’s graphical user interface.
44
Menu Start screen
>
5.1 Start screen

14439
When starting the device, the start screen of the graphical user interface appears (special case:
system start after initial commissioning or firmware update: → Start screen 'Basic settings'
(→ page 111)). The start screen displays the status information of important system components.
Moreover, the graphical user interface is accessed and operated from the start screen.
AS-i master 1 operation mode

= Protected mode
= Projection mode
AS-i master 2 operation mode
→ AS-i master 1 operation mode
only available for devices with 2 AS-i masters
Control instance of the AS-i slave outputs
= Manual | Manual with PLC
= Gateway | Gateway with PLC
= PLC
Status of the EtherNet/IP connection
=active
=inactive
► Press [Menu] function key to go to the menu (→ Menu functions (→ page 46))
OR:
► Press [OSC] function key to go to the Online Support Center (→ Online Support Center (OSC) (→ page 123))
45
Menu Quick setup
>
5.2 Quick setup

7273
The [Quick setup] menu provides fast access to the most important device functions.
Navigation path Functions
→ Quick setup: Project AS-i networks (→ page 47)

→ Quick setup: Configure the operating mode of the AS-i masters (→ page 48)
→ Quick setup: Configure the output access (→ page 49)
→ Quick setup: Access the device via QR code (→ page 49)
→ Quick setup: configure the EtherNet/IP interface (→ page 50)
→ Quick setup: Set the configuration mode (→ page 51)
→ Quick setup: Set the configuration interface (→ page 52)
→ Quick setup: Address the AS-i slaves connected to AS-i master 1 (→ page 54)
→ Quick setup: Address the AS-i slaves connected to AS-i master 2 (→ page 55)
46
Menu Quick setup
>
5.2.1 Quick setup: Project AS-i networks

8973
During projection adaptation, the AS-i master carries out the following actions:
 The configuration data of all detected AS-i slaves (LDS) is saved
 The detected AS-i slaves are added to the list of projected slaves (LPS)
To carry out the projection adaptation on AS-i master 1 and/or AS-i master 2:
1 Select the menu page
►
► Select [Project all] tab.
2 Select the AS-i master for projection adaptation
► Set the following parameters as required:
Parameter Meaning Possible values
[AS-i master 1] Select AS-i master 1 for projection = Exclude AS-i master 1 from projection
adaptation adaptation
= Include AS-i master 1 in projection adaptation
[AS-i master 2] Select AS-i master 2 for projection = Exclude AS-i master 2 from projection
adaptation adaptation
(only available for devices with 2 Include AS-i master 2 in projection adaptation
AS-i masters) =
3 Start the projection adaptation

► Press [Start projection process].
> The selected AS-i masters go into "projection mode".
> A projection adaptation is carried out on the selected AS-i masters.
> After the projection adaptation, the selected AS-i masters go into "protected mode".
47
Menu Quick setup
>
5.2.2 Quick setup: Configure the operating mode of the AS-i masters
8974
Information regarding the operating modes of an AS-i master:→ Operating modes of the AS-i
master (→ page 137)
To configure the operating modes of the AS-i masters:

►
► Select [Operation modes] tab.
2 Configure the operating mode of AS-i master 1 and the behaviour of the connected AS-i slaves
> In group [AS-i master 1] , set the following parameters as required:
[Projection mode] Active operating mode of the = Projection mode inactive:

AS-i master AS-i network runs in protected mode (normal
mode)
= Projection mode active:

AS-i network can be projected.
(→ Quick setup: Address the AS-i slaves connected to
AS-i master 1 (→ page 54) or → Quick setup:
Address the AS-i slaves connected to AS-i master 2
(→ page 55))
[No slave reset] Behaviour of the AS-i slaves = Slave is reset when changing the operating
when changing the operating mode:
mode When changing the operating mode, the
AS-i slaves will be reset for a short moment
(reset or offline phase).
= Slave is not reset when changing the operating

mode:
When changing the operating mode, the
AS-i slaves continue to operate without
interruption.
> Selected values are applied.

3 Optional: set the operating mode of AS-i master 2 and the behaviour of the AS-i slaves
► Repeat step 2 for the group [AS-i master 2].
48
Menu Quick setup
>
5.2.3 Quick setup: Configure the output access

17867
Only one control instance at a time can have write access to the outputs of the connected AS-i slaves.
The operator configures the control instance with the parameter [Output access].
To configure the control instance of the AS-i slave outputs:
►
► Select [Operation modes] tab.
2 Set the control instance for the outputs of the AS-i slaves
► From the list [Output access], select the desired value:
[Output access] Control instance of the AS-i Gateway = A higher-level PLC controls the outputs of
slave outputs the AS-i slaves.
Manual = The operator controls the outputs of the

AS-i slaves via the graphical user interface.
PLC = The device-internal PLC controls the
outputs of the AS-i slaves.
3 Save the changes

► Press [Accept selection] to save the changes.
> The selected instance controls the outputs of the AS-i slaves.
>
5.2.4 Quick setup: Access the device via QR code

11764
The QR code (Quick Response Code) allows the operator to access the web interface of the device
from a smartphone or tablet PC.
Requirements:
 The AS-i device must be connected to a wireless LAN router with switch functionality.
(→ Connection via Ethernet network (→ page 135))
 The smartphone/tablet PC is connected to the wireless LAN router.
 The smartphone/tablet PC provides a camera function.
 The smartphone/tablet PC has a QR-code reader installed.
1 Select menu page
►
► Select the [QR-Code] tab.
> The display shows the QR code.
2 Read the QR code
► Start the QR code reading app and scan the QR code.
> The smartphone displays the web interface of the device (→ Remote access (→ page 39)).
49
Menu Quick setup
>
5.2.5 Quick setup: Configure the EtherNet/IP interface

12131
The device provides the following options for configuration of the EtherNet/IP interface:
 Manual = The operator sets the interface parameters (IP address, network mask,
gateway address) manually.
 Automatic = The interface parameters are automatically set through one of the following
protocols.
– Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)
– Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP)
In order to obtain the interface parameters automatically via DHCP or BOOTP, the device
must be connected to a DHCP or BOOTP server.
► Enable the DHCP/BOOTP server on the fieldbus controller.
► Connect the EtherNet/IP interface (X6/X7) to a DHCP/BOOTP server.
To configure the IP parameters of the EtherNet/IP interface:

►
► Select [EtherNet/IP] tab.
2 Display the current settings
> The parameters below show the active settings:
[IP mode] active configuration method Static = The operator sets the IP parameters
manually.
DHCP = The interface receives the IP parameters
from a DHCP server.
BOOTP = The interface receives the IP parameters

from a BOOTP server.
[IP address] IP address of the interface e.g. 192.168.10.100
[Subnet mask] Network mask of the network e.g. 255.255.255.0
segment
[Gateway address] IP address of the network e.g. 192.168.10.1
gateway
► Select one of the following actions:

– Configure the IP parameters manually: continue with → step 3
– Configure the IP parameters automatically: continue with → step 4
3 Configure the IP parameters manually
► From the list [IP mode], select the value Static.
– [IP address]
– [Subnet mask]
– [Gateway address]
► Press [Accept] to save the changes.
► Continue with → step 5
50
Menu Quick setup
4 Configure the IP parameters automatically

► From the list [IP mode], select either DHCP or BOOTP.
> The device receives the IP parameters from a DHCP or BOOTP server.
The automatic configuration of the interface can take up to 10 seconds.
5 Display the current settings

> The parameters (→ step 2) show the active IP settings of the EtherNet/IP interface.
>
5.2.6 Quick setup: Set the configuration mode

12236
The device can be configured in two different ways:

Top-down mode: The device-specific parameters and the module configuration are set via
the projection software of the EtherNet/IP controller.
Independent mode: The parameters of the EtherNet/IP interface are set via the graphical
user interface of the device.
More information: → Configuration mode (→ page 335)
►
► Select [EtherNet/IP] tab.
2 Set the configuration mode
[Configuration mode] Active configuration mode of Top-Down = The device-specific parameters and
the device the module configuration are set via
the projection software of the
EtherNet/IP controller.
Independent = The parameters of the EtherNet/IP

interface are set via the graphical
user interface of the device.
3 Save the changes

51
Menu Quick setup
>
5.2.7 Quick setup: Set the configuration interface

8991
The device provides the following options for configuration of the EtherNet configuration interface:
 Automatic = The interface parameters are set automatically. The operator can choose
between these protocols:
– Zero Configuration Networking (Zeroconf)
The device must be connected to a DHCP server to automatically receive the interface
parameters via DHCP.
► Connect the configuration interface (X3) to a DHCP server.
To configure the IP parameters of the configuration interface:

►
► Select [Configuration interface] tab.
2 Show the active settings
[Optain IP address Active method for the = Manual assignment of the interface parameters
autom.] configuration of the interface through the operator
parameters
= Automatic assignment of the interface
parameters
[IP status] Configuration protocol used Static = The operator sets the IP parameters
manually.
DHCP = The IP parameters are set by a DHCP

server.
Zeroconf = The IP parameters are set automatically

with the Zeroconf protocol.
segment
gateway
► Take one of the following actions:

– Configure the IP parameters manually: continue with → step 3
– Configure the IP parameters automatically: continue with → step 4
3 Configure the IP parameters manually
► Uncheck [Optain IP address autom.].
– [IP address]
52
Menu Quick setup
– [Subnet mask]
4 Configure the IP parameters automatically
► Check [Optain IP address autom.].
> The device tries to obtain IP parameters from a DHCP server.
> If the IP parameter configuration via DHCP server fails, the device will generate the IP parameters by means of the
Zeroconf protocol.
The automatic configuration of the interface takes approx. 10 seconds.
5 Show the current settings

> The parameters (→ step 2) show the active IP settings of the configuration interface.
53
Menu Quick setup
>
5.2.8 Quick setup: Address the AS-i slaves connected to AS-i master 1
8992
To change the address of an AS-i slave connected to AS-i master 1:

►
► Select [Addressing AS-i 1] tab.
2 Select the AS-i slave
> The page provides an overview of the current addressing
and status of the AS-i slaves on the selected AS-i master
(→ figure)
Notes on colour codes: → Overview of slave states
(→ page 31)
► Select the AS-i slave of which want to change the
address.
► Use [Select] to activate the selected AS-i slave.
3 Select a new AS-i address
> The page provides an overview of the free AS-i
addresses (→ figure)
Notes on colour codes: → Overview of free slave
addresses (→ page 33)
► Select the address to be assigned to the AS-i slave.
► Assign the selected address with [Select].
> The confirmation prompt appears.

► Confirm the message with [OK].
> The AS-i slave has new address.
> The page provides an overview of the current addressing
and configuration errors (→ figure)
4 Address additional AS-i slaves (optional)

► Repeat steps 2 and 3 to address additional AS-i slaves.
After the address change, the present configuration no longer corresponds to the stored
configuration.
> The slave status indicates a configuration error.
To eliminate the configuration error:
► Start a projection adaptation (→ Quick setup: Project AS-i networks (→ page 47)).
54
Menu Quick setup
>
5.2.9 Quick setup: Address the AS-i slaves connected to AS-i master 2
11671
To change the address of an AS-i slave connected to AS-i master 2

►
► Select [Addressing AS-i 2] tab.
2 Change the AS-i slave address
The procedure for addressing the AS-i slaves connected to AS-i master 2 is the same as for addressing the AS-i slaves
connected to AS-i master 1 (→ Quick setup: address the AS-i slaves connected to AS-i master 1 (→ page 54)).
55
Menu AS-i 1 / AS-i 2
>
5.3 AS-i 1 / AS-i 2

14197
The [AS-i 1] and [AS-i 2] menus provide access to configuration functions of the AS-i networks.
The [AS-i 2] menu is only available for devices with two AS-i masters!
Navigation path Content
AS-i master settings

→ Set the operating mode of the AS-i master (→ page 57)
>
→ Carry out a projection adaptation (→ page 58)
→ Set the monitoring functions of the AS-i master (→ page 58)
>
AS-i network diagnosis
→ Display and reset the error counters (→ page 59)
>
→ Display the error statistics of the AS-i slaves (→ page 59)
→ Display the voltage supply analysis (→ page 60)
> → Display and reset performance data (→ page 60)
AS-i slave settings

→ Display the input/output data of the AS-i slave (→ page 61)
>
→ Change the digital output values manually (→ page 63)
→ Change the analogue output values manually (→ page 63)
> → Show AS-i slave information (→ page 64)
→ Change an AS-i slave address (→ page 65)
→ Change an AS-i slave parameter output (→ page 65)
→ Change the Extended ID1 of the AS-i slave (→ page 66)
56
>
5.3.1 AS-i 1 / AS-i 2: Master setup

8996
The menu item [Master setup] provides access to the configuration options of the selected AS-i
master.
>
Set the operating mode of the AS-i master

15877
More information on the operating modes of the AS-i master: → Operating modes of the AS-i
master (→ page 137)
To set the operating mode of the AS-i master:

► > or >
2 Set the operating mode of AS-i master 1 and the behaviour of the connected AS-i slaves
> Set the following parameters as required:
[Projection mode] Active operating mode of the = Projection mode inactive:

AS-i master AS-i network operates in protected mode
(normal mode)
= Projection mode active:

AS-i network can be projected.
[No slave reset] Behaviour of the AS-i slaves = Slave is reset when changing the operating
when changing the operating mode:
mode When changing the operating mode, the
AS-i slaves will be reset for a short moment
(reset or offline phase).
= Slave is not reset when changing the operating

mode:
When changing the operating mode, the
AS-i slaves continue to operate without
interruption.
57
>
Carry out a projection adaptation

8938
During projection adaptation, the AS-i master stores the configuration of all AS-i slaves currently found
on the AS-i network in its memory and assigns a valid AS-i address to each of them.
The projection adaptation can only be carried out in projection mode:

► [Projection mode] must be checked (→ Set the operating mode of the AS-i master
(→ page 57)).
To launch the projection adaptation:

► > or >
2 Carry out a projection adaptation
► Press [Start projection process] button.
> The projection adaptation is carried out.
If successful:
> All slaves on the AS-i master are projected.
If not successful:
> The Online Support Center displays an error message.
► Remove the error and repeat the process.
>
Set the monitoring functions of the AS-i master

11728
To set the monitoring functions of the selected AS-i master:

► > or >
2 Set the monitoring functions of the AS-i master
[Automatic addressing] Behaviour if AS-i slave is = New AS-i slave obtains the next free address
replaced
= The new AS-i slave obtains the same address
as the old AS-i slave if the following conditions
are met:
– The new AS-i slave has the address 0.
– The old and the new AS-i slave have the
same slave profile.
[Earth fault detection] Detection of earth faults = Do not detect earth faults in the AS-i system
= Detect earth faults in the AS-i system
[Double address Double address detection = Do not detect AS-i slaves with the same
detection] address
= Detect AS-i slaves with the same address
58
>
5.3.2 AS-i 1 / AS-i 2: Diagnosis

9039
The [Diagnosis] menu provides access to the diagnostic data of the selected AS-i network.
>
Display and reset the error counters

9042
To display and reset the AS-i error counters:

► > or >
► Select [Error counters] tab.
2 Display the error counters
> Page shows the following information:
Designation Meaning
Telegrams Number of message errors that occurred

Configuration Number of configuration errors that occurred
Voltage < 22,5V Number of voltage errors < 22.5 V
Voltage < 19,0V Number of voltage errors < 19.0 V
Earth fault Number of detected earth faults
3 Optional: reset the error counters

► Press [Reset] button.
> All error counters are reset to 0.
>
Display the error statistics of the AS-i slaves

9087
To display the error messages of the AS-i slaves on the selected AS-i master:
► > or >
► Select [Errors / slave] tab.
2 Display the error statistics of the AS-i slaves
Column header Meaning
Adress Address of the AS-i slave

S/A Number of errors of the single or A slave at this address
B Number of errors of the B slave at this address
► Use [] / [] to scroll through the table.
59
>
Display the voltage supply analysis

9088
To display the voltage supply analysis:

► > or >
► Select [Power supply] tab.
2 Display the voltage supply analysis
Designation Meaning Possible values
Power supply Method of voltage supply Aux = Voltage is supplied separately by the
AS-i network and AUX 24 V.
AS-i = Voltage is only supplied by the

AS-i network.
Power24 = Voltage is supplied by data decoupling
module.
AS-i voltage AS-i voltage measured (in [V]) e.g. 30.3 V
DC earth fault Evaluation of the network symmetry AS-i network is symmetrical

=
AS-i network is asymmetrical
=
AS-i network has earth fault
=
Graphical representation of the network symmetry:
>
Display and reset performance data

9089
To display the performance statistics of the selected AS-i master:

► > or >
► Select [Performance] tab.
2 Display performance data
Designation Meaning
Activated slaves Number of active AS-i slaves on the AS-i network
AS-i cycle time [ms] AS-i cycle time (value in [ms])
 minimum shortest cycle time
 maximum longest cycle time
 current current cycle time
3 Optional: reset the performance data

> The saved statistic data for minimum and maximum cycle times are deleted.
60
>
5.3.3 AS-i 1 / AS-i 2: AS-i slaves

9037
The [AS-i Slaves] menu provides access to information and configuration options of the AS-i slaves.
The scope of configuration options shown ([Data] and [Setup] tab) varies according to
the status of the selected AS-i slaves.
>
Display the input/output data of the AS-i slave

10934
To display the input/output data or the parameter output of the selected AS-i slaves:
► > or >
► Select an AS-i slave (→ Slave selector (→ page 30)).
► Select [Data] tab.
2 Display input/output data
> Depending on the profile of the selected AS-i slave, the page displays the following data:
>
Digital input
15972
Designation Meaning Example / Possible values
[Inputs] Current values of the digital inputs

(binary and hexadecimal
representation)
= Data bit is switched off (0 / OFF)
= Data bit is switched on (1 / ON)
>
Analogue input
15973
[Inputs] Current values of the analogue input

channels and information about their
status
 [Valid] The Valid bit indicates whether the = Invalid value

displayed value is valid.
= Valid value
 [Overflow] The Overflow bit indicates whether = Value within valid value range
the displayed value is within the
value range. = Valid value range exceeded
61
>
Digital output
15974
[Outputs] Current values of the digital outputs

representation)
 [Jog mode] The parameter controls the = Jog mode disabled ("switch mode")
behaviour of the outputs in the event > The changes do not affect the output until you quit the
of a changed output value. editing mode.
= Jog mode enabled ("momentary switch mode")

> The changes immediately affect the output.
>
Analogue output
15975

[Outputs] Current values of the analogue
output channels and information
about their status
 [Analogue Current status of the analogue Not O.K.

status] outputs =
= O.K.
 [Channel x] Current value of the analogue output per digit:

channel x 0 ... 9
(x = 1...n; n = number of channels
per AS-i slave)
>
Parameter input
15843
[Parameter input] Current value of the parameter input

representation)
62
>
Change the digital output values manually

10939
WARNING
Risk of personal injury! Risk of material damage to the machine/plant!
The operator is responsible for any consequences caused by the manual change of the digital ouput
values!
► Secure the concerned area.
► Only trained personnel is allowed to set outputs manually.
If the jog mode is deactivated:
After changing the slave outputs the output values remain on the changed values.
► Change the inverted outputs again immediately to the original values after the end of the test!
To change the digital output values of an AS-i slave manually:
1 Enable manual access to the outputs

► Set parameter [Output access] = Manual (→ Set the output access (→ page 75)).
► > or >
3 Set the digital output values manually
> The group [Outputs] displays the current value of the digital output (binary and hexadecimal representation).
► [Jog mode] to be set as required. (→ Digital output (→ page 62))
► Change the desired output value bit by bit.
> Selected value is applied.
>
Change the analogue output values manually

10940
To change the analogue output values of an AS-i slave manually:

► Parameter [Output access] = set to Manual (→ Set the output access (→ page 75)).
► > or >
3 Set the analogue output values manually
> [Outputs] group shows the current value of the analogue output.
► Change the value of the requested channel one digit at a time (→ Numerical field (→ page 36)).
► Optional: repeat step 3 to change further channels.
63
>
Show AS-i slave information

10935
To display information about an AS-i slave:

► > or >
► Select [Information] tab.
2 Display information about the AS-i slave
[AS-i Slave address] Current address of the AS-i slave e.g. 13B
[Slave status] Current status of the AS-i slave = AS-i slave is active
= AS-i slave is missing
= Not projected
= Double address error
= Periphery fault
[AS-i slave profile] Current (= Current) and expected

(= Preset) slave profile (IO, ID, ID2,
ID1) in hexadecimal format
► Use [] / [] for page navigation.
64
>
Change an AS-i slave address

10944
To change the address of an AS-i slave:

► > or >
► Select [Setup] tab.
2 Change the address of the AS-i slave
► Press the [Change slave address] button.
> The page displays an overview of the free AS-i addresses (→ Overview of free slave addresses (→ page 33)).
► Select the address to be assigned to the AS-i slave and confirm with [Select] function key.
> Security prompt appears.
► Press [OK] to confirm the security prompt.
> The AS-i slave has a new address.
> The page displays an overview of the AS-i slave states (→ Overview of slave states (→ page 31)).
3 Optional: change further AS-i addresses.
► Repeat step 2 to change further AS-i slave addresses.
After the address change, the present configuration (LDS) no longer corresponds to the
stored configuration (LPS).
> The OSC displays a configuration error.
To remove the configuration error:
► start a projection adaptation (→ Carry out a projection adaptation (→ page 58)).
>
Change an AS-i slave parameter output

10945
To change the parameter output of an AS-i slave:

► Set [Output access] = Manual (→ Set the output access (→ page 75))
► > or >
3 Change the parameter output of the AS-i slave
> The group [Parameter output] displays the current assignment of the parameter output (binary and hexadecimal
representation).
► Adjust the desired output value one position at a time.
65
>
Change the Extended ID1 of the AS-i slave

10952
To set the Extended ID1 of an AS-i slave:

► > or >
2 Set the Extended ID1
> The list [ID1] displays the current Extended ID1 value (hexadecimal format).
► Select the desired value for Extended ID1 from the list [ID1].
After changing the Extended ID1, the existing configuration no longer corresponds to the stored
configuration:
> An error message appears (configuration error).
► Start a projection adaptation (→ Carry out a projection adaptation (→ page 58)).
66
Menu System
>
5.4 System
8957
The [System] menu provides access to functions that allow configuration of the system and the

Device-internal PLC
→ System: Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) (→ page 68)
>
System information
→ Show version information (→ page 74)
>
System settings
→ Set the output access (→ page 75)
>
→ Enable/Disable the device-internal PLC (→ page 76)
→ Set the device cycle (→ page 77)
→ Switch the menu language (→ page 78)
→ Set the behaviour of the display (→ page 79)
→ Set the system time manually (→ page 81)
→ Synchronise the system time with an NTP server (→ page 82)
→ Adopt the system time of the PC (→ page 83)
→ Save the device configuration (→ page 84)
→ Restore the device configuration (→ page 85)
→ System reset (→ page 86)
→ Store diagnostic protocol (→ page 86)
System diagnostics
→ Display diagnostic data (→ page 87)
>
67
Menu System
>
5.4.1 System: Programmable Logic Controller (PLC)

8955
The [PLC] menu provides access to the device-internal PLC.

PLC information:
→ Display the status of the CODESYS PLC (→ page 69)
> >
→ Display information about PLC projects (→ page 69)
PLC settings
→ Control a single PLC application (→ page 70)
> >
→ Control PLC applications (→ page 71)
→ Show target visualisation (→ page 72)
PLC diagnosis
→ Show memory used (→ page 73)
> >
For information about the programming of the device-internal PLC with CODESYS, please
refer to the programming manual:
instructions]
68
Menu System
>
PLC: Information
11778
The [Information] menu item provides access to the PLC status and project information.
>
Display the status of the CODESYS PLC

14841
To display information about the current status of the device-internal PLC:

► > >
► Select [Status] tab.
2 Display the status of the CODESYS PLC
Status LED Status of the device-internal PLC The CODESYS PLC is disabled.
=
= The CODESYS PLC is enabled.
[Version] CODESYS version e.g. 3.5.3.60
[Node name] Name of device in CODESYS project e.g.
>
Display information about PLC projects

14842
To obtain information about the CODESYS project stored on the device-internal PLC:
► > >
► Select [Project] tab.
2 Display information about PLC projects
Designation Meaning
[Project] Name of the CODESYS project file
[Title] Name of the CODESYS project
[Version] Version number of the CODESYS project
[Author] Author of the CODESYS project
69
Menu System
>
PLC: Settings
16217
The [Settings] menu item provides access to the PLC applications (apps) on the device.
>
Control a single PLC application

14846
[App x/y]
– x ... number of the app displayed
– y ... total number of apps stored
Status and name of the application
= application has been stopped
= application has been started
Information concerning the application

– date and time of creation
– author
– version of application
– size
To control a single PLC application stored on the device:
► > >
► Select [Applications] tab.
2 Select an application
► Use [] to select the message field.
> The focus (orange frame) is on the message field.
► Use [] / [] to select the requested application.
► Perform one of the following actions:
– Launch a single PLC application: continue with → step 3
– Stop a single PLC application: continue with → step 4
3 Launch a single PLC application
► Press [Start] to launch the selected PLC application.
► Press [OK] to confirm the prompt.
> The PLC application is started.
4 Stop a single PLC application
► Press [Stop] to stop the selected application.
> The application is stopped.
5 Display information about the PLC application
> The status display of the PLC application is updated
70
Menu System
>
Control PLC applications

14847
To control all PLC applications stored on the device:

► > >
► Select [All applications] tab.
2 Display status information about the PLC applications
Designation Meaning
[Total] Number of applications stored on the device

[Started] Number of applications running
► Perform one of the following actions:

– Launch all PLC applications: continue with → step 3
– Stop all PLC applications: continue with → step 4
– Reset all PLC applications: continue with → step 5
3 Launch all PLC applications
► Press [Start] button.
> All PLC applications are started.
4 Stop all PLC applications
► Press [Stop] button.
> The confirmation prompt appears
> All PLC applications are stopped.
5 Reset all PLC applications
> All PLC applications are reset and stopped.
6 Display the status of the PLC applications
> The page shows updated information about the stored PLC applications.
> The status of the [Start], [Stop] and [Reset] buttons is updated.
71
Menu System
>
Show target visualisation

9055
Using the CODESYS programming system, the user can optionally program a target visualisation to
create an application-specific user interface for the display of AC142n. The target visualisation is
loaded onto the device together with the CODESYS project, but it must be activated manually.
If no valid target visualisation is stored on the device, a green screen appears after activating
the [Activate Target-Visu] button
To exit the target visualisation and return to the menu page:
► Press [] and [] simultaneously.
If the device does not react when entering [] + [], the key combination is deactivated.
► Activate the key combination using the system command "Show target visualisation"
(→ Command 272 (0x0110) – Display target visualisation (→ page 267))!
To activate the target visualisation:

1 Select menu page
► > >
► Select the [Activate TargetVisu] tab.
2 Start the target visualisation
► Press [Activate Target-Visu] button.
> The confirmation message appears.
► Press [OK] button to confirm the message.
> The display shows the target visualisation.
72
Menu System
>
PLC: Diagnosis
10936
The [Diagnosis] menu item provides access to diagnostic data of the device-internal PLC.
>
Show memory used

14845
To display information about the memory capacity currently used:

► > >
► Select [Memory] tab.
2 Show memory used
Designation Meaning
CODESYS Memory capacity occupied by CODESYS data (in Kbytes)

free Free memory (in Kbytes)
The current usage of memory space is read out once when calling up the menu page. These
values are not refreshed while the menu page is displayed. Any changes regarding the
memory capacity (e.g. through download of a new CODESYS project) will therefore not be
reflected in the displayed values.
To update the displayed values:
► Quit the menu page [Diagnosedaten].
► Access the menu page [Diagnosedaten] again.
> The menu page displays the current memory usage of device.
73
Menu System
>
5.4.2 System: Information

7281
The menu item [Information] provides access to the version information about the system components.
>
Show version information

11774
To display information about the hardware and software components of the device:
► >
► Select [Version] tab.
2 Show version information
[Type] Article number of the device e.g. AC142n

[SN] Serial number of the device e.g. 000000113034
[Build] Version number of the installed firmware e.g. 3.1.2
[HW version] Version number of the device main board e.g. AA
74
Menu System
>
5.4.3 System: Setup

7274
The [Setup] menu item provides access to the configuration options of the system.
>
Set the output access

9100
To set the control instance for the outputs of the AS-i slaves:
► >
► Select [System settings] tab.
2 Configure the control instance for the outputs of the AS-i slaves
► From the [Output access] list, select the required value:
[Output access] Control instance of the AS-i Gateway = A higher-level PLC controls the outputs of
slave outputs the AS-i slaves.
Manual = The operator controls the outputs of the
AS-i slaves via the graphical user interface.
PLC = The device-internal PLC controls the
outputs of the AS-i slaves.
3 Save the changes

If the value PLC is selected, the system will automatically enable the device-internal PLC
(→ Enable/Disable the device-internal PLC (→ page 76)).
75
Menu System
>
Enable/Disable the device-internal PLC

15841
NOTICE
Risk of material damage to the machine/plant!
When disabling the device-internal PLC, all running PLC applications will be stopped. This could have
undesirable effects on the controlled process if the PLC figures as the control unit for the AS-i slave
outputs.
► The PLC application should be terminated in a controlled manner before disabling the
device-internal PLC!
(→ Control PLC applications (→ page 71))
► Implement a safe state when programming the PLC applications!
When activating the device-internal PLC, PLC applications stored on the device are started
automatically.
► Implement a safe start state when programming the PLC applications!
To set the internal Programmable Logic Controller (PLC):

► >
2 Enable/Disable the device-internal PLC
> Set the following parameters in the group [Activate CODESYS PLC]:
[Use PLC] State of the device-internal = Device-internal PLC is disabled.
CODESYS PLC
= Device-internal PLC is enabled.
76
Menu System
>
Set the device cycle

11780
NOTICE
Risk of material damage to the machine/plant!
A device cycle that is too short can have undesirable effects on the correct transmission of the
process and control data between the PLC and peripheral devices (higher-level PLC, AS-i slaves).
► Ensure a sufficiently long cycle time!
If the PLC is disabled, the device operates with a fixed cycle time of 0.7 ms.
If the PLC is enabled, the operator can set the device cycle to a value between 1.5 ms and
3.0 ms. (→ Enable/Disable the device-internal PLC (→ page 76))
To set the device cycle:

► >
2 Set the device cycle
[Device cycle] Active → Device parameters. 1.5 ms = 1.5 milliseconds
2.0 ms = 2.0 milliseconds
3 Save the changes

► Press [Accept selection].
77
Menu System
>
Switch the menu language

7088
To select the language of the GUI texts:

► >
2 Select the menu language
> The list [Language] shows the active language in which the GUI texts are displayed.
[Language] Language in which the GUI Deutsch = German

texts are displayed
English = English
Français = French
Español = Spanish
Italiano = Italian
Português = Portuguese
3 Save the changes

> GUI elements are displayed in the requested language.
>
Optional: switch the language with a key combination

15834
The languages available on the device are saved in an ordered list:

 German
 English
 French
 Spanish
 Italian
 Portuguese
To switch the language with a key combination (from the active language):
► Press [] + [] to select the previous language in the list.
OR:
► Press [] + [] to select the next language in the list.
> GUI elements are displayed in the requested language.
The key combination allows you to change the language from any menu page.
78
Menu System
>
Set the behaviour of the display

9107
To set the display behaviour (screen saver, behaviour in case of inactivity):

► >
2 Set the behaviour of the display
[Screen saver] Status of the screen saver = Screen saver is inactive:

Display remains permanently switched on.
= Screen saver is active:

Display is switched off after 10 minutes of
inactivity.
[Return to start screen] Display behaviour in case of = The currently selected menu page stays on the
extended period of user screen.
inactivity
= When the set time has elapsed, the display
automatically changes to the start screen.
79
Menu System
>
Set the system time

10954
The system time consists of date and time. The device provides the following options for setting the
system time:
 Manual: The operator sets the date and time manually.
 Via NTP server: The device has an NTP client. The system time can be synchronised
with an NTP server.
 Apply the system time of The device adopts the system time of a PC/laptop (only available via
a PC/laptop: the web interface of the device)
To set the system time:

► >
► Select [Clock] tab.
2 Display the current system time settings
> The following parameters display the current system time settings:
[Activate NTP] = NTP client is deactivated:
Device adopts the manually set values for [Time]
and [Date].
= NTP client is not active:

From an NTP server, the device adopts the
values for [Time] and [Date].
Status LED Status of NTP client and NTP client is deactivated:
NTP not active =
synchronisation with NTP Applicable are the manually
server set values for [Time] and
[Date].
NTP client is active:
NTP waiting =
Device waits for messages
from NTP server.
NTP client is active:
NTP successful =
Time synchronisation with
NTP server was successful.
[Time] System time e.g. 12:23:56
(format [hh:mm:ss])
[Date] System date e.g. 2014-04-23
(format [yyyy-mm-dd])
3 Select the configuration method

► Select one of the following:
– Set the system time manually (→ page 81)
– Synchronise the system time with an NTP server (→ page 82)
– Adopt the system time of the PC (→ page 83)
80
Menu System
>
Set the system time manually

10963
To set the system time manually:

► >
2 Deactivate the NTP client of the device
► Uncheck [Activate NTP] (→ Set the system time (→ page 80)).
> The changes become effective.
> NTP status: NTP not active
3 Set the system time manually
► [Time] and [Date] must be set (Operating notes: → Numerical field (→ page 36))
Seconds cannot be changed manually. When leaving the edit mode, the seconds will be
automatically set to 0.
81
Menu System
>
Synchronise the system time with an NTP server

10969
To synchronise the system time with an NTP server:
To synchronise the system time and date via Network Time Protocol (NTP), connect the
configuration interface of the device to an NTP server directly or over a network.
► >
2 Deactivate the NTP client
> The IP address field and the [NTP-Offset] list can be edited.
3 Set the IP address of the NTP server and NTP offset
IP address field IP address of the NTP server e.g. 192.168.0.100
List [NTP-Offset] Time zone of the NTP server no offset = System time is taken from NTP server
(optional) in UTC (Universal without offset
Coordinated Time).
UTC -12:00 Adopt time zones according to UTC
... division (displayed number of hours
UTC +12:00 will be added/subtracted)

> The device tries to synchronise the system time with the NTP server.
> NTP status: NTP waiting
In case of a successful synchronisation:

> NTP status: NTP successful
> [Time] and [Date] show the synchronised values.
In case of a failed synchronisation:
► Check the settings of the IP parameters of the configuration interface.
► Check the IP address of the NTP server.
► Repeat the process.
82
Menu System
>
Adopt the system time of the PC

15756
This function can only be executed via the web interface of the device.
To adopt the date and time of a PC/laptop:

1 Go to the web interface of the device
► Connect the PC/laptop to the configuration interface (X3) of the device.
► Start the web browser and access the web interface of the device.
► >
► Select the [Clock] tab.
3 Adopt the system time of the PC/laptop
► In group [Apply Time and Date from the PC] press [OK].
> The device applies the date and time of the PC/laptop.
> [Date] and [Time] display the system time.
83
Menu System
>
Clone device configuration

7087
The AC142n makes it possible to create an image of the current device configuration, to transfer it to
another device and activate there (clone). The export/import of the configuration file is made via an SD
card.
A device configuration consists of the following settings:
 System settings
 AS-i 1/AS-i 2 settings
 EtherNet/IP settings
 PLC applications (incl. PLC task configuration and variables)
The user can only access this function via the local user interface of the device!
Cloning a device configuration is only possible if the following conditions are met.
 Source and target device have the same firmware version
 Source and target device have the same article number.
>
Save the device configuration

16199
Pay attention to the notes (→ Clone device configuration (→ page 84))!
To save the currently valid device configuration on an SD card:

► >
> Select [Configuration] tab.
2 Save the device configuration
► Insert an SD card with sufficient free space in the SD card slot.
► Press [Export Configuration].
> The device stores the currently valid device configuration on the SD card.
84
Menu System
>
Restore the device configuration

14442
NOTICE
Risk of undesirable system behaviour!
The AC142n is not available during the recovery process.
► Ensure by means of organisational measures that the AC142n system is in the safe state during
the recovery process!
16200
NOTICE
Risk of data loss and undesirable system behaviour!
If the import of the device configuration is interrupted (e.g. because the device is disconnected from
the electric circuit), not all the configuration data will saved on the device.
► Do not interrupt the recovery process!
► Ensure a stable voltage supply!
Pay attention to the notes (→ Clone device configuration (→ page 84))!

If there are more than one device configurations stored in the root directory of the SD card, then
the newest file (time stamp) will be used for the restoring process.
To transfer a stored device configuration to the device:

► >
► Select [Configuration] tab.
2 Restore the device configuration
► Insert an SD card with the stored device configuration in the SD card slot.
► Press [Import configuration] button.
> A warning message appears.
► Use [OK] to confirm the message.
> The device configuration is loaded and saved onto the device.
The device reboots.
85
Menu System
>
System reset
8977
To reset the device:

► >
► Select [Reset] tab.
2 Carry out a system reset
► Press [Restart].
> A safety query is displayed..
► Press [OK] to confirm the security prompt.
> The device reboots.
>
Store diagnostic protocol

7040
Using the diagnostic protocol, the user can archive the current device configuration or provide all
relevant information to the service staff via the device settings.
The diagnostic protocol contains the following information in the selected user language:
 AS-i configuration
 EtherNet/IP configuration
 System settings
 CODESYS information
 OSC history
This function is only available via the web-interface of the device (→ Remote access
(→ page 39)).
Requirements:
► Connect the device with PC/laptop (→ Configuration interface: connection concepts (→ page 133)).
► Start the web browser and open the web interface of the device (→ Recommended browsers (→ page 40)).
1 Select menu page
► >
► Select the [Diagnostic protocol] tab.
2 Store diagnostic protocol
► Press the [Generate diagnostic protocol] button.
> AC142n generates diagnostic protocol.
> The progress bar indicates the status of the process.
> A dialogue window appears.
► Select file name and memory location and press [OK] to confirm.
> The diagnostic protocol is stored as an HTML file at the selected location.
86
Menu System
>
5.4.4 System: Diagnosis

9053:
The [Diagnosis] menu item provides access to the diagnostic data of the device.
>
Display diagnostic data

15827
To display the diagnostic data of the device:

► >
2 Display the diagnostic data
Operating time Operating time of system and All times indicated in [YY-DDD-HH:MM] format:
[YY-DDD HH:MM] components YY = years
DDD = days
 total Operating time of device HH = hours
MM = minutes
 current Operating time of device since last
system start
 LCD Operating time of LCD
 PLC Operating time of controller
Temperature Current device temperature Indications in [°C] (→ Note)
Power supply Voltage supply of device Aux = Voltage is supplied separately
by AS-i network and AUX 24
V.
AS-i = Voltage is only supplied by the
AS-i network.
Power module = Voltage is supplied by data

decoupling module.
The temperature monitoring of AC142n continuously checks whether the system

temperature exceeds the maximum permissible values. If certain limit values are
exceeded, the temperature monitoring generates warnings or error messages which
are displayed in the → Online Support Center (OSC) (→ page 123).
The following temperature ranges apply:
 Normal zone (0 °C ... 80 °C): no warnings, no error messages
 Transitional zone (80.1 °C ... 85 °C): warnings
 Critical zone: (> 85.1 °C): error messages
87
Menu Interfaces
>
5.5 Interfaces
15143
The [Interfaces] menu provides access to the configuration options of the device's interfaces.
Configuration interface
→ Configure the IP parameters manually (→ page 90)
>
→ Configure the IP parameters automatically (→ page 90)
→ Show EtherNet information (→ page 91)
EtherNet/IP interface
→ Interfaces: EtherNet/IP interface (→ page 92)
>
88
Menu Interfaces
>
5.5.1 Interfaces: Configuration interface

7279
The [Configuration interface] menu provides access to the settings of the EtherNet configuration
interface (port X3).
>
Notes on IP settings
14856
The device provides the following options for configuration of the Ethernet configuration interface:
 Manual = The operator sets the interface parameters (IP address, network
mask, gateway address) manually.
 Automatic = The interface parameters are set automatically. The operator can
choose between these protocols:
– Zero Configuration Networking (Zeroconf)
To display the current configuration method and the active IP parameters of the configuration
interface:
► >
► Select [IP setup] tab.
2 Show the active settings
[Optain IP address Active method for the = Manual assignment of interface parameters
autom.] configuration of the interface through operator
parameters
= Automatic assignment of interface parameters
[IP status] Configuration protocol used Static = The operator sets the IP parameters
manually.
DHCP = The IP parameters are set by a DHCP

server.
Zeroconf = The IP parameters are set automatically

with the Zeroconf protocol.

segment
gateway
► Select one of the following options:

– Configure the IP parameters manually (→ page 90)
– Configure the IP parameters automatically (→ page 90)
89
Menu Interfaces
>
Configure the IP parameters manually

14860
To configure the IP parameters of the configuration interface manually:

► >
2 Deactivate the NTP client
► Uncheck [Optain IP address autom.] (→ Notes on IP settings (→ page 89)).
> The IP address fields [IP address], [Subnet mask] and [Gateway address] can be edited.
3 Configure the IP parameters
► Configure the following parameters as required (→ Notes on IP settings (→ page 89)):
– [IP address]
– [Subnet mask]
4 Save the changes
► Press [Accept] button.
> [IP status] displays the active configuration method: Static
>
Configure the IP parameters automatically

14859
The device must be connected to a DHCP server to automatically receive the interface
parameters via DHCP.
► Connect the configuration interface (X3) to a DHCP server.
To configure the IP parameters of the configuration interface automatically:

► >
2 Enable the NTP client
► Activate the [Optain IP address autom.] check box (→ Notes on IP settings (→ page 89))
3 Save the changes
> The device tries to obtain the IP parameters from a DHCP server.
> If the configuration of IP parameters via DHCP server fails, the device will generate the IP parameters with the
Zeroconf protocol.
> [IP address], [Subnet mask] and [Gateway address] display the set IP parameters.
> [IP status] displays the active configuration method: DHCP or Zeroconf.
The automatic configuration of the IP parameters takes approx. 10 seconds.
90
Menu Interfaces
>
Show EtherNet information

14857
To show Ethernet information regarding the configuration interface:

► >
► Select [Ethernet informationen] tab.
2 Show Ethernet information
> The page shows the following information:
Designation Meaning
[MAC ID] MAC identification number of the interface
91
Menu Interfaces
>
5.5.2 Interfaces: EtherNet/IP interface

16197
The [EtherNet/IP] menu provides access to information, settings and diagnostic data of the
EtherNet/IP interface.
EtherNet/IP information
→ Show information (→ page 93)
> >
→ Display EtherNet/IP data (→ page 94)
→ Display the module configuration (→ page 94)
→ Download the device and I/O description (→ page 95)
EtherNet/IP settings
→ Configure the IP parameters manually (→ page 97)
> >
→ Configure the IP parameters automatically (→ page 97)
→ Set the configuration mode (→ page 98)
→ Set the device-specific parameters (→ page 99)
→ Set the EtherNet/IP module configuration (→ page 101)
EtherNet/IP diagnosis
→ Display diagnostic data (→ page 103)
> >
92
Menu Interfaces
>
EtherNet/IP: Information
11781
The menu item [Information] provides access to information regarding the EtherNet/IP interface.
>
Show information
12166
To display information about the EtherNet/IP interface:

► > >
► Select [Information] tab.
2 Show information about the EtherNet/IP interface
Designation Meaning
[Manufacturer ID] Displays the manufacturer ID

[Unit type] Displays the device type
[Product code] Displays the product code
[Revision no.] Displays the revision number
[SN] Displays the serial number
[Product name] Displays the product name
93
Menu Interfaces
>
Display EtherNet/IP data

12168
To display the EtherNet/IP data:

► > >
2 Display EtherNet/IP data
[MAC-ID] MAC ID of the EtherNet/IP interface e.g. 00:02:01:01:27:CF
[RPI Zeit] RPI time in milliseconds [ms]

(RPI = Requested Packet Interval)
[Analog. Number of analogue channels per → Set the device-specific parameters (→ page 99)
channels/O-slave] input slave
[Analog. Number of analogue channels per → Set the device-specific parameters (→ page 99)
channels/O-slave] output slave
[Failsafe state] Behaviour of the AS-i outputs in case → Set the device-specific parameters (→ page 99)
of an interrupted EtherNet/IP
connection
[Parameter download] The AS-i slave parameters are = Parameters are not downloaded, i.e. the
transferred when a EtherNet/IP AS-i slaves are activated using the
connection is established. parameters that are set in the device.
Parameter can only be configured = Each time a EtherNet/IP connection is
via the projection software! established, the AS-i slave parameters
are loaded from the EtherNet/IP controller
to the device, activated in the slaves and
stored non-volatilely.
[Change byte order] Byte order in a data word → Set the device-specific parameters (→ page 99)
The set parameter value applies
to all attached tables.
>
Display the module configuration

12193
To display the current module configuration:

► > > .
► Select [Module configuration] tab.
2 Display the module configuration
> The page shows the active configuration of the EtherNet/IP slots.
(Meaning of parameter values:→ Set the EtherNet/IP module configuration (→ page 101))
94
Menu Interfaces
>
Download the device and I/O description

12194
This function is only available via the web-interface of the device (→ Remote access
(→ page 39)).
Requirements:
► Connect the device with PC/laptop (→ Configuration interface: connection concepts (→ page 133)).
► Start the web browser and open the web interface of the device (→ Recommended browsers (→ page 40)).
► > >
► Select [File download] tab.
> The menu screen [File download] appears.
2 Download the EDS file and the description of the inputs and outputs.
► Click the link [Download EDS-Datei] to download the device description.
► Click the button [Download I/O Description file].
> The web server creates a description file of the inputs and outputs.
► Save the created file.
95
Menu Interfaces
>
EtherNet/IP: Setup
16196
The [Setup] menu item provides access to the configuration options of the EtherNet/IP interface.
>
Notes on IP settings
12228
The device provides the following options for configuration of the EtherNet/IP interface:
 Automatic = The interface parameters are automatically set through one of the
following protocols.
– Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP)
To display the current configuration method for IP parameters of the EtherNet/IP interface:
► > >
► Select [Fieldbus] tab.
2 Display the current configuration method for IP parameters
> The [IP mode] list shows the active configuration method:
- Static = The operator sets the IP parameters manually.
- DHCP = The device receives the IP parameters from a DHCP

server.
- BOOTP = The device receives the IP parameters from a BOOTP
server.
3 Display the current IP parameters of the EtherNet/IP interface

> The following parameters show the current IP settings of the EtherNet/IP interface:
Designation Meaning
[IP address] IP address of the configuration interface
[Subnet mask] Subnet mask of the network segment
[Gateway address] IP address of the EtherNet gateway
96
Menu Interfaces
>
Configure the IP parameters manually

15883
To manually configure the IP parameters of the EtherNet/IP interface:

► > >
2 Activate the manual configuration
► From the list [IP mode], select the value Static (→ Notes on IP settings (→ page 96)).
> The IP address fields [IP address], [Subnet mask] and [Gateway address] can be edited.
3 Set the IP parameters of the EtherNet/IP interface
– [IP address]
– [Subnet mask]
4 Save the changes
>
Configure the IP parameters automatically

15881
In order to obtain the interface parameters automatically via DHCP or BOOTP, the device
must be connected to a DHCP or BOOTP server.
► Connect the EtherNet/IP interfaces (X6/X7) to a DHCP/BOOTP server.
► > >
2 Select the configuration method
► From the list [IP mode], select either DHCP or BOOTP.
3 Save the changes
> The device receives the IP parameters from a DHCP or BOOTP server.
> [IP address], [Subnet mask] and [Gateway address] show the current values.
97
Menu Interfaces
>
Set the configuration mode

15884
More information: → Configuration mode (→ page 335)
To set the configuration mode of the device:

► > >
2 Select the configuration method for the EtherNet/IP parameters
> Set the following parameter as required:
[configuration mode] Active configuration mode of Top-Down = The device-specific parameters and the
the device module configuration are set via the
projection software of the EtherNet/IP
controller.
Independent = The parameters of the EtherNet/IP
interface are set via the graphical user
interface of the device.
3 Save the changes

► Press [Accept].
98
Menu Interfaces
>
Set the device-specific parameters

15909
The parameters can only be changed if the configuration mode is set to Independent (→ Set
the configuration mode (→ page 98)).
To set the device-specific parameters: set the number of channels to be transmitted per analogue
input slave:
► > >
► Select [Parameter] tab.
2 Set the number of analogue channels per input slave
► Set the following parameter as required:
[Analog. channels/I-slave] Number of analogue 1 channel per A/B = 1 channel per A/B slave
channels transmitted per OR:
input slave channels 1 + 3 per single slave
1 channel = 1 channel per single slave
OR:
1 channel per A slave
2 channels = 2 channels per single slave

OR:
2 channels per A slave
OR:
2 channels per A/B slave
3 Set the number of analogue channels per output slave

[Analog. Number of analogue 1 channel per A/B = 1 channel per A/B slave
channels/O-slave] channels transmitted per OR:
output slave channels 1 + 3 per single slave
1 channel = 1 channel per single slave

OR:
1 channel per A slave

OR:
2 channels per A slave

OR:
2 channels per A/B slave
99
Menu Interfaces
4 Set the failsafe state

[Failsafe state] Behaviour of the slave Hold outputs = The outputs hold the values which
outputs in case of an were present immediately before
interrupted EtherNet/IP the connection was interrupted.
connection
Output reset = The outputs are reset to their initial
values.
5 Set the byte order of a word

[Change byte order] Byte order in a data word = Byte order remains unchanged.
= Byte order is inverted.
6 Save the changes

► Press [Accept].
100
Menu Interfaces
>
Set the EtherNet/IP module configuration

12230
NOTICE
Risk of data loss!
For the transmission of cyclic process data between the device and the EtherNet/IP PLC, a limited
number of data words is available for each direction of transmission:
 Input data (= modules 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 10, 13, 14): 248 words
 Output data (= modules 2, 4, 6, 8, 11, 12, 15): 248 words
If the EtherNet/IP modules have been parameterised in such a way that the cyclic input and output
data comprise more than 248 words per direction of transmission, any data from the 249th word will
not be transmitted and will therefore be lost.
► Parameterise the EtherNet/IP modules in a way to ensure that the input and output data do not
exceed the maximum number of words to be transmitted!
The EtherNet/IP modules can only be configured on the device if the configuration mode is set
to Independent (→ Set the configuration mode (→ page 98)).
To define which cyclic process data are to be transmitted in the EtherNet/IP slots:
► > >
► Select [Module configuration] tab.
2 Set the EtherNet/IP slots for the digital inputs and outputs of the AS-i slaves
> Set the following parameters as required:
[EtherNet/IP Slot 1] Digital inputs of the S/A slaves → Slot 1 – Digital input data single or A slaves, AS-i master
connected to AS-i master 1 1 (→ page 183)
[EtherNet/IP Slot 2] Digital outputs of the S/A slaves → Slot 2 – Digital output data single or A slaves, AS-i
connected to AS-i master 1 master 1 (→ page 183)
[EtherNet/IP Slot 3] Digital inputs of the S/A slaves → Slot 3 – Digital input data single or A slaves, AS-i master
connected to AS-i master 2 2 (→ page 184)
(only devices with 2 AS-i
masters)
[EtherNet/IP Slot 4] Digital outputs of the S/A slaves → Slot 4 – Digital output data single or A slaves, AS-i
connected to AS-i master 2 master 2 (→ page 184)
masters)
[EtherNet/IP Slot 5] Digital inputs of the B slaves → Slot 5 – Digital input data B slaves, AS-i master 1
connected to AS-i master 1 (→ page 185)
[EtherNet/IP Slot 6] Digital outputs of the B slaves → Slot 6 – Digital output data B slaves, AS-i master 1
[EtherNet/IP Slot 7] Digital inputs of the B slaves → Slot 7 – Digital input data B slaves, AS-i master 2
masters)
[EtherNet/IP Slot 8] Digital outputs of the B slaves → Slot 8 – Digital output data B slaves, AS-i master 2
masters)
101
Menu Interfaces
3 Set the EtherNet/IP slots for the analogue inputs and outputs of the AS-i slaves
[EtherNet/IP Slot 9] Analogue inputs, area 1 → Slot 9 – Analogue input data (→ page 189)
[EtherNet/IP Slot 10] Analogue inputs, area 2 → Slot 10 – Analogue input data (→ page 190)
[EtherNet/IP Slot 11] Analogue outputs, area 1 → Slot 11 – Analogue output data (→ page 191)
[EtherNet/IP Slot 12] Analogue outputs, area 2 → Slot 12 – Analogue output data (→ page 192)
What data is transmitted in each word depends on the set values of the parameters [Analog. channels/I-Slave] and
[Analog. channels/O-Slave].
4 Configure the EtherNet/IP slot for diagnostic data

[EtherNet/IP Slot 13] Diagnostic data transmitted to the → Slot 13 – Diagnostic data (→ page 197)
fieldbus controller
5 Set the EtherNet/IP slots for the data between the EtherNet/IP controller and the device-internal PLC
[EtherNet/IP Slot 14] Scope of data transferred from → Slot 14 – Inputs from PLC (→ page 215)
the device-internal PLC to the
EtherNet/IP controller.
[EtherNet/IP Slot 15] Scope of data transferred from → Slot 15 – Outputs to PLC (→ page 216)
the EtherNet/IP controller to the
7 Save the changes

► Press [Accept].
102
Menu Interfaces
>
EtherNet/IP: Diagnosis
9126
The menu item [Diagnosis] provides access to the diagnostic data of the EtherNet/IP interface:
>
Display diagnostic data

15875
To display the diagnostic data of the EtherNet/IP interfaces:

► > >
2 Display diagnostic data
[EtherNet/IP connection status] Displays the connection status of the

EtherNet/IP interfaces
 Status Port X6 Connection status port X6 = No connection to fieldbus controller
= Connection to fieldbus controller

established
 Status Port X7 Connection status port X7 = No connection to fieldbus controller
= Connection to fieldbus controller

established
103
Menu ifm system solutions
>
5.6 ifm system solutions

7065
This menu is only available via the web interface of AC142n.

→ Remote access (→ page 39)
The [ifm system solutions] menu provides access to information and installation options for ifm system
solutions.

ifm system solutions:
→ Show information about installed ifm apps (→ page 106)
→ Install single/basic app (→ page 107)
→ Install multi app (→ page 108)
→ Update ifm apps (→ page 109)
→ Uninstall ifm apps (→ page 109)
104
>
5.6.1 Notes on ifm system solutions

12229
With the AC142n, ifm electronic offers different system solutions for the simple implementation of
typical applications. System solutions consist of applications which are processed by the
device-internal CODESYS PLC.
ifm system solutions and user-created applications must not be stored and run simultaneously
on the AC142n!
► Delete all CODESYS system solutions stored on the device before installing new ifm
system solutions or user applications!
ifm system solutions can only be installed and run if the device-internal PLC is activated.
► Activate the PLC of the AC142n (→ Enable/Disable the device-internal PLC (→ page 76))!
Users can download the available ifm system solutions from ifm's website.
→ www.ifm.com > Service > Download > Industrial communication
>
Types of ifm system solutions

8682
There are 2 types of ifm system solutions:

 Single apps
Single apps provide the user with a
CODESYS-based solution. Single apps directly
access the I/O mechanisms of the CODESYS
PLC. Only one single app must be stored and
executed on the device.
 Basic app + multi apps

Multi apps provide the user with the possibility to
execute different CODESYS-based solutions in
parallel. The multi apps use the services of the
basic app in order to be able to access the inputs
and outputs of AC142n at the same time. They
operate as a pure communication layer between
the I/O mechanisms of the CODESYS PLC and
the connected multi apps.
Maximum 5 multi apps at a time can be stored
and executed in parallel on the device.
105
>
5.6.2 Show information about installed ifm apps

9041
In order to display information about the ifm system solutions installed on the device:
1 Select menu page
►
► Select the [Information] tab.
2 Show information about installed ifm apps
> The browser window displays an overview of the installed ifm apps. The following information is displayed for each
ifm app:
Information Meaning
[Name] Designation of the ifm system solution app

[Version] Version number of the ifm system solution app
[Type] Type of ifm app (single, basic, multi)
[Description] Description of the functionality of the ifm system solution app
[Licence information] Licence information about the ifm system solution in the selected user language
[Link to the ifm system solution app] Hyperlink for web visualisation of the ifm system solution app
106
>
5.6.3 Install single/basic app

7092
Only one single app, basic app or CODESYS PLC application must be stored on the device.
When installing a single/basic app, all ifm system solutions and CODESYS PLC applications
stored on the device are deleted.
To install a single or basic app on the device:

1 Select menu page
►
► Select the [Installation] tab.
2 Select single/basic app
► Activate the [Search] button.
► Select the requested single/basic app (*.ifmapp) and click [Open] to load it.
> The file name of the selected single/basic app is displayed.
3 Transfer the single/basic app to the device
► Click on [Transfer file] button to transfer the selected single/basic app to the device.
> After successful transfer: The window shows information about the copied single/basic app.
► Optional: Click on [Cancel] to stop the download process.
4 Install the single/basic app
► Activate the [Start installation] button.
> CODESYS PLC is stopped.
> All ifm system solutions and CODESYS PLC applications on the device are deleted.
> The selected single/basic app is installed.
> The progress bar indicates the status of the installation process.
> CODESYS PLC is started.
> The installed single/basic app is automatically started (RUN state).
107
>
5.6.4 Install multi app

6954
Maximum 5 multi apps must be stored on the device simultaneously.
To install a multi app on the device:

Requirements:
> The basic app is installed and started (RUN state) (→ Install single/basic app (→ page 107))
1 Select menu page
►
► Select the [Installation] tab.
2 Select multi app
► Activate the [Search] button.
► Select the requested multi app (*.ifmapp) and click the [Open] button to load it.
> The file name of the selected multi app is displayed.
3 Transfer the multi app onto the device
► Click on [Transfer file] to transfer the selected multi app onto the device.
> After successful transfer: The window shows information about the copied multi app.
► Optional: Click on [Cancel] to stop the download process.
4 Install multi app
► Activate the [Start installation] button.
> The selected multi app is installed.
> The progress bar indicates the status of the installation process.
> The installed multi app is automatically started (RUN state).
► Optional: Repeat steps 2 to 4 to install further multi apps.
108
>
5.6.5 Update ifm apps

6925
The user can update an ifm system solution installed on the device by overwriting it with the new
version of the ifm system solution.
Naming convention for ifm apps:
AppName_x.y.z.ifmapp
AppName = name of the ifm app
x.y.z = version number of the ifm app
ifmapp = file extension of an ifm app
To update an ifm system solution:

Requirements:
> The name of the new ifm app and the installed ifm app must be identical.
> The version number of the ifm app must be greater than that of the installed ifm app.
To determine the version of the installed ifm app: → Show information about installed ifm apps
(→ page 106)
1 Download new ifm app

► Download new version of the ifm system solution (→ Notes on ifm system solutions (→ page 105)).
2 Update the installed ifm app
► Install the new ifm system solution
– Single/basic app: → Install single/basic app (→ page 107)
– multi app: → Install multi app (→ page 108)
>
5.6.6 Uninstall ifm apps

7014
When a basic app is uninstalled, all dependent multi apps are uninstalled, too.
Before uninstalling an ifm app, the CODESYS PLC of AC142n is stopped. After successful
uninstallation, the CODESYS PLC is started again.
To uninstall an ifm system solution installed on the device:

1 Display installed ifm apps
► Show information about installed ifm apps (→ page 106)
2 Uninstall ifm app
► In the section of the respective ifm app:
Activate the [Uninstall app] button.
> The selected ifm app is uninstalled.
109
Setup ifm system solutions
6 Setup
Connect the device ...............................................................................................................................111

Start screen 'Basic settings'..................................................................................................................111
Update the firmware of the device ........................................................................................................114
Connect and address AS-i slaves ........................................................................................................118
Setup of EtherNet/IP .............................................................................................................................118
Setup of the configuration interface ......................................................................................................118
Exchange AS-i slave ............................................................................................................................119
15844
This section provides information for setting up the device following mounting, electrical installation
and connection to AS-i network components.
Observe the notes on mounting and electrical connection of the device!

→ Operating instructions (supplied with the device)
110
Setup Connect the device
>
6.1 Connect the device

9000
>
6.1.1 EtherNet/IP interface

12120
To connect the device to a EtherNet/IP network:

► Integrate the device into the EtherNet/IP network via the X6 and/or X7 EtherNet ports according to the requested
topology.
Details → Interfaces (→ page 130)
>
6.1.2 Configuration interface

12122
To access the device via the configuration interface (e.g. web interface, programming interface of the
device-internal PLC):
► Select one of the connection concepts to connect the configuration interface (X3) to the programming PC/laptop.
Details: → Configuration interface: connection concepts (→ page 133)
6.2 Start screen 'Basic settings'

11226
The 'Basic settings' start screen appears after the following actions/events:
 initial setup
 firmware update
 data loss due to battery failure
The basic settings provide access to the GUI texts, system time, etc.
The same operating notes as for the page view apply for the 'Basic settings' start screen
(→ Page view (→ page 25)).
111
Setup Start screen 'Basic settings'
>
6.2.1 Change the basic settings of the device

18511
To change the basic settings of the device:

1 Start the device
► Connect the device to a circuit.
> The device starts.
> The display shows the start screen "Basic settings"
(picture).
2 Set the language of the GUI texts
► The list shows the active language.
► Use [] / []to select the list.
> The focus (= orange frame) is on the selected list.
► Open the list with the left function key [Select].
► Use [] / [] to mark the desired language and press
[Select] to activate it.
> The GUI texts appear in the selected language.
► Press [Next] to go to the next page.
3 Set the system time
Option 1: Set the system time manually
► [Time] and [Date] show the current system time.
► Activate [Activate NTP] checkbox.
> Status LED =
► In the [Time] roup, set the desired clock time one
position at a time.
► In the [Date] group, set the desired date one position at a
time.
► Press [Finish] to save the changes and go to the
standard start screen.
112
Setup Start screen 'Basic settings'
Option 2: Synchronise the system time with an NTP server

► Activate [Activate NTP] checkbox.
> Status LED =
► Enter the IP address of the NTP server in the IP address
field.
► Pick the time zone of the NTP server from the list (UTC
format).
> The NTP client of the device synchronises the system
time with the selected NTP server.
► Wait until status LED =
> [Date] and [Time] show the synchronised values.
► Press [Finish] to save the changes and go to the
standard start screen.
113
Setup Update the firmware of the device
>
6.3 Update the firmware of the device

18399
NOTICE
Risk of data loss!
Interrupting a firmware update leads to a loss of the current system and fieldbus settings.
► Secure the device settings before carrying out a firmware update! (→ Save the device configuration
(→ page 84))
► Ensure an uninterrupted voltage supply during the firmware update!
To update the firmware of the device:

 Firmware update from SD card (→ page 115)
 Firmware update via the web interface (→ page 116)
>
6.3.1 Behaviour of the settings upon firmware update

17058
The following settings/data records remain valid upon a firmware update:
Setting / data record Path to the menu page

User language of the GUI [System] > [Setup] > [System settings]
Display settings (screen saver, return) [System] > [Setup] > [System settings]
System time (date/time) [System] > [Setup] > [Clock]
NTP settings [System] > [Setup] > [Clock]
Operating hours counter [System] > [Diagnosis]
AS-i master settings and configuration data [AS-i 1] / [AS-i 2] > [Master setup]
IP parameters of the configuration interface [Interfaces] > [Configuration interface] > [IP-Setup]
Fieldbus settings [Interfaces] > [EtherNet/IP] > [Setup]
The following settings/data records are reinitalised with their default values upon firmware update:
Setting / data record Reset value Path to the menu page
Control of the outputs Gateway [System] > [Setup] > [System settings]
Activate CODESYS PLC deactivated [System] > [Setup] > [System settings]
Device cycle 0.7 ms [System] > [Setup] > [System settings]
OSC Delete system messages Start page > [OSC]
Retain variables 0x00 --
114
>
6.3.2 Firmware update from SD card

18400
Pay attention to notes on memory behaviour (→ Behaviour of the settings upon firmware update
(→ page 114))!
>
1 Preparations
► Download the new firmware file from the ifm website.
► Copy the firmware file into the root directory of an SD card.
► Insert the SD card containing the firmware file in the SD card slot (→ SD card slot (→ page 18)).
>
2 Start the recovery mode

► Separate the device from the circuit.
► Perform the following actions simultaneously:
 Press the left function key and the arrow keys []
and [] simultaneously and keep them pressed
(→ picture).
 Connect the device to a circuit.
► Keep the keys pressed until the screen [ifm Recovery]
appears (approx. 10 s).
>
3 Update the firmware

► Use the arrow keys [] / [] to select the menu item
[Install from SD] (→ picture).
► Press [OK] using the left function key.
> The updating process starts.
> The display shows the progress of the firmware update.
> A status message appears once the firmware has been
updated successfully.
>
4 Reboot the device

► Use the arrow keys [] / [] to select the [Reboot] button.
► Press [OK] to reboot the device.
> The device reboots with the current firmware.
> The start screen "Basic settings" appears (→ Start screen 'Basic settings' (→ page 111)).
115
>
6.3.3 Firmware update via the web interface

18401
Pay attention to notes on memory behaviour (→ Behaviour of the settings upon firmware update
(→ page 114))!
>
1 Preparations
► Download the new firmware file from the ifm website.
► Connect the PC/laptop to the configuration interface (X3) of the device.
(→ Configuration interface: connection concepts (→ page 133))
>
2 Start the recovery mode

► Separate the device from the circuit.
► Perform the following actions simultaneously:
 Press the left function key and the arrow keys []
and [] simultaneously and keep them pressed
(→ picture).
 Connect the device to a circuit.
► Keep the keys pressed until the screen [ifm Recovery]
appears (approx. 10 s).
>
3 Optional: adjust the IP parameters

[Network Setup].
► Press [OK] to go to the network setup.
> The display shows the page [Network Setup] (→ picture).
> The page shows the current IP address of the device.
Option 1: obtain the IP parameters from a DHCP server
► Connect the configuration interface to the DHCP server.
[DHCP].
► Press [OK] to activate the DHCP client of the device.
> The device obtains the IP parameters from the DHCP
server.
> If not successful, the device will create the IP parameters by
means of the Zeroconf protocol.
> The display shows the [Network Setup] page with the new
IP address.
► Leave the network setup with [Back].
> The display shows the [ifm Recovery] page.
Option 2: configure the IP parameters manually
116
[Manual Setup].
► Activate the manual setup with [OK].
> The display shows the [Static IP setup] page (→ picture)
► Use the arrow keys [] / [] to select the following menu
items one after the other and set them as required:
– [IP Address]
– [Network Mask]
– [Default gateway]
► Press [Apply] to save the set values.
> The display shows the [Network Setup] page with the new
IP address.
► Leave the network setup with [Back].
> The display shows the [ifm Recovery] page.
>
4 Update the firmware

► Access the web interface of the device.
> The web interface of the recovery mode appears:
► Press the [Search ...] button.

> The file explorer appears.
► Select the firmware file and press [Open].
> The field [Select image to upload] shows the file path and name of the firmware file.
► Press [send] to start the updating process.
> The display and web interface show the progress of the firmware update.
> A status message appears once the firmware has been updated successfully.
>
5 Reboot the device

► Click on the tab [Reboot]
> The device reboots with the current firmware.
> The start screen "Basic settings" appears (→ Start screen 'Basic settings' (→ page 111)).
117
Setup Connect and address AS-i slaves
>
6.4 Connect and address AS-i slaves

9004
To integrate AS-i slaves into an AS-i network that is controlled by one of the AS-i masters of the
device:
1 Connect and address the AS-i slave
► Connect ONE AS-i slave to be addressed to the requested AS-i network (AS-i 1 or AS-i 2) as described in the
corresponding installation instructions.
► Assign the desired address to the AS-i slave
(→ Quick setup: Address the AS-i slaves connected to AS-i master 1 (→ page 54) or → Quick setup:
Address the AS-i slaves connected to AS-i master 2 (→ page 55)).
► Optional: Repeat step 1 to connect and address further AS-i slaves.
2 Project the AS-i network
► Carry out a projection adaptation on the AS-i master with the newly addressed AS-i slaves
(→ Quick setup: Project AS-i networks (→ page 47)).
> The AS-i master adds the detected slaves (LDS) to the list of the projected slaves (LPS).
> The AS-i slaves have a valid address and are integrated in the AS-i network.
>
6.5 Setup of EtherNet/IP

12123
Detailed information on how to configure the EtherNet/IP network: → operating

instructions of the EtherNet/IP master
To connect the device to the EtherNet/IP network:

 Use the top-down configuration mode:→ Configuration mode: Top-down (→ page 336)
 Use the independent configuration mode: → Configuration mode: Independent (→ page 341)
Before setting the EtherNet/IP parameters, all slaves must be connected to and
addressed in the AS-i network.
► Project the AS-i slaves (→ Connect and address AS-i slaves (→ page 118))
>
6.6 Setup of the configuration interface

9006
To set up the EtherNet configuration interface (X3):
► >
► Set the interface parameters (→ Notes on IP settings (→ page 89)).
118
Setup Exchange AS-i slave
>
6.7 Exchange AS-i slave

10249
AC142n makes it possible to replace an AS-i slave by a new AS-i slave in the operating mode
"protected mode".
Requirements:
> The new and the old AS-i slave have the same device profile(→ Profiles of the AS-i slaves (→ page 145)).
> The new AS-i slave has the address 0.
> Parameter [Automat. adressing] is activated (→ Set the monitoring functions of the AS-i master (→ page 58)).
1 Remove old AS-i slave
► Disconnect the AS-i slave to be replaced from the AS-i network
> AC142n detects a configuration error and generates a corresponding OSC message.
2 Install new AS-i slave
► Connect the new AS-i slave to the AS-i network.
> AC142n detects the new AS-i slave and automatically assigns the address of the old AS-i slave.
> The OSC error message disappears.
> The new AS-i slave is operational.
119
Troubleshooting Exchange AS-i slave
7 Troubleshooting
Status LED ...........................................................................................................................................121

Online diagnosis function .....................................................................................................................122
Online Support Center (OSC) ..............................................................................................................123
7288
This chapter offers information regarding fault detection and troubleshooting.
120
Troubleshooting Status LED
>
7.1 Status LED

7094
The status LEDs of the device provide information about the current state of system components.
Position of the status LED on device: → Where is what on the AS-i device? (→ page 16)
>
7.1.1 Status LED: Basic device

6950
Status LED Description

H1 green lights Device has started, warnings or error messages.
yellow flashes 0.5 Hz There is a warning but not an error message.
red flashes 2Hz There is an error message.
>
7.1.2 Status LED: fieldbus EtherNet/IP

12115
Status LED Description
H2 yellow off no data transmission

flashes Reception of data
H3 green off no physical connection
lights Physical connection OK
H4 yellow off no data transmission
flashes Reception of data
H5 green off no physical connection
lights Physical connection OK
121
Troubleshooting Online diagnosis function
>
7.2 Online diagnosis function

7055
The device offers an online diagnosis function. It helps the user to find and eliminate the source of
occuring failures and errors.
>
7.2.1 Message types

18986
The online diagnostic function of AC142n distinguishes 3 types of messages:
Symbol Message type Meaning
Error  An error occurred; proper operation of the device is disturbed.

 User action absolutely required
Warning  An irregularity has occurred
 User action required
Event  An uncritical event has occurred
 No user action required
>
7.2.2 Locate error sources

7063
The online diagnosis function helps the operator to locate the source of ooccuring warning and error
messages. The menu symbols of the navigation path leading to the menu page, which generates a
message, are overlain by a warning / error symbol. Thus, the operator can easily locate the error
source.
Example:
> The following menu symbols are overlain by an error
symbol:
 Main navigation bar: [AS-i 1]
 Sub navigation bar: [Slaves]
> Error source on menu page [AS-i 1] > [Slaves]
If a function unit of the device causes a warning and an error message at the same time, then
the error symbol is displayed.
122
Troubleshooting Online Support Center (OSC)
>
7.3 Online Support Center (OSC)

7058
The Online Support Center (OSC) displays detailed information about occuring events, failures and
errors.
The OSC has the following appearance:
List to select a filter and name of the selected filter
Message
An message consists of error symbol, timestamp and
detailed information about the errors
Number of the message displayed and total number of
messages
Tabs to select a view
[Current]: → OSC: View current error messages
(→ page 124)
[History]: → OSC: Show message history
(→ page 125)
123
>
7.3.1 OSC: View current error messages

15842
The [Current] tab lists all current messages. The messages are in chronological order. All messages
regarding warnings and errors are displayd.
Information about the different types of messages: → Message types (→ page 122)
Overview of possible OSC messages of the device: → OSC messages (→ page 345)
To view the error messages that are currently active:

►
► Select [Current] tab.
2 Show current messages
> The page shows the error messages that are currently active.
► Press [] to select the message field.
► Use []/[] to go through the error messages.
3 Optional: filter messages
[Filter] System component the All = Display all messages in chronological

message was created in order of their occurrence (= preset).
AS-i 1 = Display messages that were created in

AS-i master 1.
AS-i master 2 (only selectable for
devices with 2 AS-i masters).
System = Display messages that were created in
the system.
> Page shows filtered messages.
124
>
7.3.2 OSC: Show message history

11775
The [History] tab lists all messages which occurred during the operating time of the device. The
messages are shown in chronological order. The device displays messages regarding events,
warnings and errors.
The messages are stored in a ring buffer. The ring buffer can store 2000 messages. If full, the
device overwrites the oldest message(s) (time stamp).
There is a message pair for each failure (warning, error). It indicates the time of occurrence of the
failure and the time at which the cause of the failure was rectified. The symbols of the messages are
correspondingly marked.
Example: Error message
= Time at which the error occurred
= Time at which the cause of the fault was rectified.
To display the history of messages created so far again:

1 Select menu page
► On the start screen: Select [OSC].
► Select [History] tab.
2 Display all messages
> The page shows all previously generated error messages.
► Press [] to select the message field.
► Use []/[] to go through the error messages.
3 Optional: Filter messages
[Filter] System component the All = Display all messages in chronological

message was created in order of their occurrence (= preset).
AS-i master 1.

AS-i master 2 (only selectable for
devices with 2 AS-i masters).
System = Display messages that were created in
the system.
> Page shows filtered messages.
125
Appendix Online Support Center (OSC)
8 Appendix
Approval tests / certifications ................................................................................................................127

Technical data ......................................................................................................................................128
Address assignment in Ethernet networks ...........................................................................................132
Configuration interface: connection concepts ......................................................................................133
AS-i master ...........................................................................................................................................136
AS-i slaves ............................................................................................................................................144
Fieldbus EtherNet/IP ............................................................................................................................155
OSC messages ....................................................................................................................................345
Information on AS-i ...............................................................................................................................348
7156
126
Appendix Approval tests / certifications
>
8.1 Approval tests / certifications

12555
Software-relevant certifications:
 AS-i master profile M4 according to AS-i specification 3.0
 Fieldbus certification: conform to EtherNet/IP specification
127
Appendix Technical data
>
8.2 Technical data
Housing.................................................................................................................................................129
Display elements ..................................................................................................................................129
Operation ..............................................................................................................................................129
Power supply connections ....................................................................................................................129
Interfaces ..............................................................................................................................................130
Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) .................................................................................................131
9011
128
>
8.2.1 Housing
9044
Housing
Degrees of protection IP20
Material Aluminium, steel sheet, Makrolon
Dimensions (W x H x D) [mm] 93 x 128,2 x 106,2
>
8.2.2 Display elements

9045
Display
Technology LCD, colour

Size 35 x 28 mm (1.8“)
Resolution 220 x 176 pixels
Colour depth 18 bits (= 262 144 possible colours)
LED
Possible colours red, green, yellow

>
8.2.3 Operation
9046
Membrane keys
Function keys 2x
Navigation keys / arrow keys 4x
>
8.2.4 Power supply connections

9047
Versorgungsanschlüsse
AS-i 1, AS-i 2, FE plug-in, 6 poles, Combicon
24 V Spannungsversorgung plug-in, 2 poles, Combicon
129
>
8.2.5 Interfaces
11070
EtherNet configuration interface

Connection 1x RJ45
Transmission 10/100 Mbits/s
Protocol HTTP, FTP, Telnet
Designation X3
12556
EtherNet fieldbus interface

Connection 2x RJ45
Transmission rate 10/100 Mbits/s
Transfer times  PLC disabled: 0.7 ms
 PLC enabled: 1.5 ... 3.0 ms (adjustable)
Jitter 0.7 ms
Protocol EtherNet/IP
Services and data  Cyclic EtherNet/IP services incl. diagnostic data
 Acyclic EtherNet/IP services incl. AS-i command channel
 EDS file
Switch integrated 2-port switch (iRT capable)
Designation  X6 (EtherNet/IP port 2)
 X7 (EtherNet/IP port 1)
11072
SD card slot
Media SD memory cards (max. 32 Gbytes)
Format SDHC format is supported
Supported file formats FAT, FAT32
130
>
8.2.6 Programmable Logic Controller (PLC)

14849
Programmable Logic Controller (PLC)

Type CODESYS Control Runtime System
(incl. CODESYS WebVisu)
Programming system CODESYS Development System
(from version 3.5 SP4 patch 2)
Programming languages FBD, SFC, CFC, IL, LD, ST
Available memory for PLC applications / RETAIN approx. 10 MB / 4072 bytes
variables
131
Appendix Address assignment in Ethernet networks
>
8.3 Address assignment in Ethernet networks

14436
In the Ethernet network every IP address MUST be unique.

The following IP addresses are reserved for network-internal purposes and are therefore not
allowed as an address for participants: nnn.nnn.nnn.0 | nnn.nnn.nnn.255.
Only network participants whose subnet mask is identical and whose IP addresses are
identical with respect to the subnet mask can communicate with each other.
Rule:
If part of the subnet mask = 255, the corresponding IP address parts must be identical.
If part of the subnet mask = 0, the corresponding IP address parts must be different.
If the subnet mask = 255.255.255.0, 254 participants communicating with each other are
possible in the network.
If the subnet mask = 255.255.0.0, 256x254 = 65 024 participants communicating with each
other are possible in the network.
In the same physical network different subnet masks of the participants are allowed. They form
different groups of participants which cannot communicate with groups of participants having
other subnet masks.
In case of doubt or problems please contact your system administrator.
Examples:
Participant A Participant A Participant B Participant B Communication of
IP address Subnet mask IP address Subnet mask participants possible?
192.168.82.247 255.255.255.0 192.168.82.10 255.255.255.0 Yes, 254 participants possible
192.168.82.247 255.255.255.0 192.168.82.247 255.255.255.0 No (same IP address)
192.168.82.247 255.255.255.0 192.168.82.10 255.255.0.0 No (different subnet mask)
192.168.82.247 255.255.255.0 192.168.116.10 255.255.255.0 No (different IP address range:
82 vs. 116)
192.168.222.213 255.255.0.0 192.168.222.123 255.255.0.0 Yes, 65 024 participants
possible
192.168.111.213 255.255.0.0 192.168.222.123 255.255.0.0 Yes, 65 024 participants
possible
192.168.82.247 255.255.255.0 192.168.82.0 255.255.255.0 no; the whole network is
disturbed because the IP
address xxx.xxx.xxx.0 is not
allowed
132
Appendix Configuration interface: connection concepts
>
8.4 Configuration interface: connection concepts
Direct link ..............................................................................................................................................134

Connection via Ethernet network .........................................................................................................135
7071
To be able to access the web interface and the programming interface of the device-internal PLC, the
configuration interface (X3) must be connected to a computer. The device supports the following
connection types:
 Direct connection (→ Direct link (→ page 134))
 Connection via an EtherNet network (→ Connection via Ethernet network (→ page 135))
133
>
8.4.1 Direct link

12551
To establish a direct connection to the device:
► Connect configuration interface X3 of the device with the Ethernet interface of the PC/laptop.
► Setup the IP parameters of the configuration interface (X3) to enable communication between the device and the
PC/Laptop.
→ Notes on IP settings (→ page 89)
→ Address assignment in Ethernet networks (→ page 132)
> Connection bewtween device and PC/Laptop is established.
134
>
8.4.2 Connection via Ethernet network

12553
To establish a connection via a Ethernet network, the device has to be connected with a coupling
element (e.g. Ethernet switch, WLAN router).
>
Option 1: Transmit fieldbus and web interface data via different networks
14182
► Enable DHCP functionality of the Ethernet switch/WLAN router.

► Connect configuration interface (X3) via Ethernet cable with the Ethernet switch/WLAN router (
► Activate [Optain IP address autom.] (→ Notes on IP settings (→ page 89)).
► If required, activate the option 'Obtain an IP address automatically' in the IP settings of the PC.
► Connect PC/laptop with the Ethernet switch.
OR:
► Connect PC/laptop wireless with the WLAN router .
> Connection between device and PC/laptop is established.
>
Option 2: transfer fieldbus and web interface data over the same network
14183
► Connect the configuration interface (X3) to the EtherNet/IP interface (X7) using an EtherNet cable.
► Activate the DHCP function of the EtherNet switch for automatic assignment of IP addresses.
► Connect the EtherNet/IP interface (X6) to the EtherNet switch using an EtherNet cable.
► The parameter [Optain IP address autom.] must be activated (→ Notes on IP settings (→ page 89)).
► Connect the PC/laptop to the EtherNet switch using an EtherNet cable.
► If necessary, activate the option [Optain IP address automatically] in the IP settings of the PC/laptop.
> The device and the PC/laptop/mobile device are connected over the IP network.
135
Appendix AS-i master
>
8.5 AS-i master
Operating modes of the AS-i master ....................................................................................................137

Master flags ..........................................................................................................................................139
8900
Master = Handles the complete organisation on the bus. The master decides on the bus access time
and polls the →slaves cyclically.
136
>
8.5.1 Operating modes of the AS-i master
Protected mode ....................................................................................................................................138

Projection mode ....................................................................................................................................138
Switch operating modes .......................................................................................................................138
8934
The AS-i master can be operated in one of the following operating modes:
137
>
Protected mode
14833
In the operating mode "Protected mode" (= normal mode), the AS-i master only communicates with
AS-i slaves that are entered in the list of projected slaves (LPS) and where current and target
configuration match.
The AS-i master automatically detects the following actions and signals a configuration error:
 an AS-i slave is added to the AS-i network (error message: Slave not projected)
 an AS-i slave is removed from the AS-i network (error message: Slave not present)
Optionally, the operator can activate/deactivate the following monitoring functions (→ Set the monitoring
functions of the AS-i master (→ page 58)):
 Automatic addressing: When a defective slave is replaced, the AS-i master controls the
addressing. The new AS-i slave obtains the same address as
the old AS-i slave if the following conditions are met:
 The new AS-i slave has the address 0.
 Both AS-i slaves have the same device profile.
 Double address recognition: The AS-i master recognises whether one or several AS-i slaves
have the same address (error message: Double address error).
 Earth-fault detection: The AS-i master detects any earth faults.
In the operating mode "Protected mode", the operator can control the PLC applications stored on the
device (start, stop, reset).
>
Projection mode
14848
In the operating mode "Projection mode", the AS-i master communicates with all AS-i slaves that are
connected to the AS-i line and do not have the address 0. Missing AS-i slaves are not detected by
the AS-i master.
In projection mode a projection adaptation can be carried out. The AS-i master reads the configuration
data of all detected AS-i slaves and saves it permanently.
>
Switch operating modes

5487
The operator / programmer can switch the operating modes of the AS-i master as follows:
 per GUI / web interface (→ Set the operating mode of the AS-i master (→ page 57))
 per function block Set_Mode (programming manual: → Set_Mode)
If an AS-i slave with the address 0 is connected, then the AS-i master cannot switch from
"projection mode" into "protected mode" !
► Address the AS-i slave correctly.
► Switch the operating mode.
138
>
8.5.2 Master flags
AS-i master status flags........................................................................................................................140

Execution control flags .........................................................................................................................141
Host flags ..............................................................................................................................................142
DAE/EE flags ........................................................................................................................................143
16936
The master flags contain information about the status of the AS-i master and the fieldbus host.
The master flags are transmitted along with the input data of the digital AS-i slaves in the acyclic data
set DS2 (→ DS2 – Digital inputs of the slaves and master flags (→ page 223)).
139
>
AS-i master status flags

7160
The AS-i master status flags provide information about the status of the AS-i master. After a status
change, the AS-i master immediately updates the flags.
The AS-i master status flags are saved in the following register:
AS-i master status flags
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ECPS ECP – – WCD CM – HWDT SER HER
Legend:
Flag Designation Description Initial value at power-on
HER Hardware Error 1 (TRUE): a hardware error occurred during the power-on 0 (FALSE)
self test
SER Software Error 1 (TRUE): Software error occurred: 0 (FALSE)
Stack Overflow, Stack Underflow, Undefined
Opcode, Instruction Fault, Illegal Access,
Watchdog Timeout
HWDT Host Watchdog 1 (TRUE): Host watchdog not triggered by the host within 0 (FALSE)
Timeout 200 ms; master changed to the offline mode
CM Configuration Missing 1 (TRUE): Configuration not yet fully received from the host. 1 (TRUE)
Becomes FALSE as soon as PCD, PP and LPS
have been set
WCD Watchdog Control 1 (TRUE): Signals the host that the watchdog signal is not 0 (FALSE)
Disabled processed in the master.
ECP Execution Control Display of the different phases the execution control goes 0
Phase through during boot (→ table).
ECPS Execution Control Display of the substates of the different execution control 0
Phase State phases (→ table).
Execution Control Phase Execution Control Phase State

0 = inactive –
1 = start phase 0 = master start and initialisation
1 = wait for configuration
2 = wait for start
2 = reserved –
3 = offline phase –
4 = detection phase –
5 = activation phase –
6 = normal operation 0 = normal data exchange
1 = slave finder activated
140
>
Execution control flags

7161
The execution control flags provide information about the execution control of the AS-i master. The
flags are updated by the AS-i master immediately after each change.
The execution control flags are saved in the following register:
Execution control flags
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
– NOPF CCOK PE – DEA AAE POK OR APF NOA CA AA AN S0 COK
Legend:
COK Config_OK 1 (TRUE): The configuration of all AS-i slaves on the 0 (FALSE)
network corresponds to the projection data
(CDI=PCD for all activated slaves) &&
(LDS=LPS=LAS)
Exception:
Flag APF = 1 and LPS = empty, then COK
=1
S0 LDS.0 1 (TRUE): Slave with address 0 found 0 (FALSE)
AN Auto_Address_Assign 1 (TRUE): Auto addressing possible 0 (FALSE)

(protected mode = active && auto
addressing = active && PCD = CDI &&
LDS <=LPS)
AA Auto_Address_Available 1 (TRUE): All the necessary conditions for auto 0 (FALSE)
addressing are fulfilled. The master waits
for slave 0.
CA Configuration_Active 0 (FALSE): Master in protected mode 0 (FALSE)
1 (TRUE): Master in projection mode
NOA Normal_Operation_Active 1 (TRUE): Master is in the normal mode 0 (FALSE)
(The AS-i master has communicated with
at least one slave since the last offline
phase. Even if the slave disappears after
this, the signal will remain set.)
APF Asi_Power_Fail 0 (FALSE): AS-i voltage OK 1 (TRUE)
1 (TRUE): AS-i voltage too low
OR Offline_Ready 1 (TRUE): Master has gone through the offline phase 0 (FALSE)
and waits for:
APF = 0 and a timeout of 1s
POK Periphery_OK 1 (TRUE): No peripheral faults present, all bits of 0 (FALSE)
LPF = 0.
AAE Auto_Address_Enable 1 (TRUE): Auto addressing switched on 0 (FALSE)
(Echo of Set_Auto_Address_Enable of
host)
DEA Data_Exchange_Active 1 (TRUE): Data exchange between master and 1 (TRUE)
slaves activated (reflects DEA of host
flags)
0 (FALSE): Instead of the data exchange, ReadID is
continually executed on the slaves.
PE Protocol Error 1 (TRUE): CTT protocol error 0 (FALSE)
0 (FALSE): No CTT protocol error
141
CCOK CTT_Config_OK 1 (TRUE): The configuration of all CTT slaves on the 0 (FALSE)
network corresponds to the projected CCT
data.
(CCDI = PCCD for all CTT slaves)
NOPF No_Offline_Phase_Flag 1 (TRUE): The master skips the offline phase if one 0 (FALSE)
of the following actions is performed:
– change to protected mode
– change of PCD
– change of LPS
– change of PCCD
0 (FALSE): The master goes through the offline phase
when changing to the protected mode the
next time.
>
Host flags
7162
The host flags are regularly updated by the host. The AS-i master cyclically checks the host flags for
changes.
The host flags are saved in the following register:
Host Flags
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – DEA OFF
Legend:

OFF Offline 1 (TRUE): Execution control of the master changes to the 0 (FALSE)
offline mode. The function Set_Offline_Mode()
is implemented via this flag.
DEA Data_Exchange_Active 1 (TRUE): Data exchange activated between master and 1 (TRUE)
slaves. The function
Set_Data_Exchange_Active() is implemented
via this flag
142
>
DAE/EE flags
16935
The DAE/EE flags indicate if the double address detection and the earth fault detection are on.
The DEA/EE flags are saved in the following register:
DAE/EE flags
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
-- -- -- -- -- -- -- DAE -- -- -- -- -- -- -- EE
active active
Legend:
Flag Designation Description Initial value at PowerOn

DAE Double address 1 (TRUE): Double address detection is on. 0 (FALSE)
active detection active 0 (FALSE): Double address detection is off.
EE active Earth fault detection is 1 (TRUE): Earth fault detection is on. 1 (TRUE)
active 0 (FALSE): Earth fault detection is off.
143
Appendix AS-i slaves
>
8.6 AS-i slaves
Profiles of AS-i slaves ...........................................................................................................................145

8893
Slave = Passive participant on the bus, only replies on request of the →master. Slaves have a clearly
defined and unique →address in the bus.
144
>
8.6.1 Profiles of AS-i slaves
Configuration data (CDI) of the slaves (slave profiles) .........................................................................146

Slave profiles for slaves with combined transaction .............................................................................153
Combined transaction – Use of analogue channels in the gateway depending on the slave profile ...153
8902
145
>
Configuration data (CDI) of the slaves (slave profiles)
Structure of the slave profile .................................................................................................................147

Description of the IO code for digital slaves .........................................................................................147
Description of the ID code (selection) ..................................................................................................148
Description of the extended ID code 1 .................................................................................................148
Description of the extended ID code 2 .................................................................................................149
Valid combinations IO code / ID code / extended ID code 2 ................................................................150
5346
The configuration data CDI (= Configuration Data Image) for single, A and B slaves is stored in a data
word. The structure is shown below and is the same for all slaves.
146
>
Structure of the slave profile

5347
The slave profile has the following structure: S-[IO code].[ID code].[ext. ID code2]
Bits 15...12 Bits 11...8 Bits 7...4 Bits 3...0
XID2 XID1 ID code IO code

extended ID code 2 extended ID code 1 ID code I/O configuration
3rd figure in the slave profile is no part of the slave profile 2nd figure in the slave profile 1st figure in the slave profile
can be changed by the user
(AS-i slave v2.0 = 0xF *) (AS-i slave v2.0 = 0xF *)
Example: AC2255
4 digital inputs, 2 digital outputs
AS-i profile = S-7.A.E
This results in the following configuration data of the slave:
0b1110 = 0xE (e.g.) 0b0111 = 0x7 0b1010 = 0xA 0b0111 = 0x7
The corresponding CDI data word is: 11100111 10100111 = 0xE7A7
*) AS-i slaves according to the AS-i specification 2.0 and older do not support the extended ID codes 1
and 2. In the master 0xF is stored for this configuration data.
>
Description of the IO code for digital slaves

5349
Structure slave profile = S-[IO-Code].x.x
Function of the periphery bit

IO code IO code (bits
[hex] 3…0)
D3 D2 D1 D0
0 0000 input input input input
1 0001 output input input input
2 0010 input / output input input input
3 0011 output output input input
4 0100 input / output input / output input input
5 0101 output output output input
6 0110 input / output input / output input / output input
7 0111 input / output input / output input / output input / output
8 1000 output output output output
9 1001 input output output output
A 1010 input / output output output output
B 1011 input input output output
C 1100 input / output input / output output output
D 1101 input input input output
E 1110 input / output input / output input / output output

F 1111 not allowed
147
>
Description of the ID code (selection)

5351
Structure slave profile = S-x.[ID-Code].x
ID code ID code (Bits Description

[hex] 3…0)
0 0000 4 I/O connections for binary sensors and/or actuators with 1 signal each
1 0001 2 dual-signal I/O connections for binary sensors and/or actuators with 2 signals each
A 1010 slave operates in the extended addressing mode (B slave or A/B slave)
B 1011 slave corresponds to Safety-at-Work

F 1111 manufacturer-specific device (cannot be replaced with products from other manufacturers)
>
Description of the extended ID code 1

5353
Can be changed by the user, however not a part of the slave profile.
Default value:
0xF for single slaves
0x7 for A/B slaves
The value is evaluated and checked by the master. The user can make an additional distinction
between slaves which do not differ in the AS-i system, e.g. slaves with different ranges for current,
voltage or frequency. This prevents damage when replacing slaves with a wrong performance range.
148
>
Description of the extended ID code 2

5355
>
Extended ID code 2 for analogue slaves with profile 7.3.x

5357
The extended ID code 2 is used to specify complex slaves.

Structure slave profile = S-7.3.[ext.ID code2]
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Description
0 0 1-channel slave
0 1 2-channel slave
1 0 4-channel slave
1 1 4-channel slave (if slave has no extended ID code)
0 transparent data exchange = binary bits
1 analogue value transmission
0 output slave
1 input slave
The ID code 2 results from a combination of the options stated above.

>
Extended ID code 2 for analogue slaves with profile 7.4.x

5358
The extended ID code 2 is used to specify complex slaves.

Structure slave profile = S-7.3.[ext. ID code2]
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Description
0 0 1-channel slave
0 1 2-channel slave
1 0 4-channel slave
1 1 4-channel slave (if slave has no extended ID code)
0 0 0 0 4 binary inputs + 4 binary outputs
0 output slave
1 input slave
The ID code 2 results from a combination of the options stated above.
149
>
Valid combinations IO code / ID code / extended ID code 2

5359
Structure slave profile = S-[IO code].[ID code].[ext. ID code2]
Ext.
IO code ID code
ID code 2 Meaning
[hex] [hex]
[hex]
0…E
0 x binary I/O connections for sensors and actuators
not: 9, B, D
0, 3, 8 1 x 1 or 2 binary sensors or actuators with 2 signals each (dual-signal devices)
0 1 x 4 binary inputs for 2 dual-signal sensors
0…E
A x slave operates in the "extended addressing mode" (B slave or A/B slave)
not: 2A
slave with extended address function:
0 A E
4 binary inputs for 2 dual-signal sensors (e.g. I/O module AC2250)
0 B x slave corresponds to Safety-at-Work
0…E F x manufacturer-specific device (cannot be replaced by other products)
single sensor with remote setting:
1 1 x
3 binary inputs + 1 binary output (e.g. sensor OC5226)
2 binary inputs for 1 dual-signal sensor AND
3 1 x
2 binary outputs for 1 dual-signal actuator
3 A x slave with extended address function
3 A 1
2 binary inputs + 1 binary output
3 A 2
4 binary inputs
quick combined transaction type 5 of 8, 12 or 16 data bits by using 2, 3 or 4 slave
6 0 x
addresses in a slave
7 0 F motor starter 2I + 2O (e.g. ZB0032)
7 0 E 4 binary inputs + 4 binary outputs (e.g. I/O module AC2251)
interface for the transmission of 6...18-bit signals;
7 1 x analogue profile for combined transaction type 1;
was replaced by S-7.3
extended slave profile for the transmission of 6...18-bit signals;
7 2 x extended analogue profile for combined transaction type 1;
was replaced by S-7.4
slave profile for 16-bit transmission with integrated support in the master;
7 3 x integrated analogue profile for combined transaction type 1
( Extended ID code 2 for analogue slaves with profile 7.3.x (→ page 149))
7 3 5 2 analogue outputs of 16 bits each (e.g. I/O module AC2618)
7 3 6 4 analogue outputs of 16 bits each (e.g. I/O module AC2518)
7 3 C 1 analogue input of 16 bits (e.g. sensor PPA020)
7 3 D 2 analogue inputs of 16 bits each (e.g. I/O module AC2616)
7 3 E 4 analogue inputs of 16 bits each (e.g. I/O module AC2516)
extended slave profile for 16-bit transmission with integrated support in the master;
7 4 x integrated extended analogue profile for combined transaction type 1
( Extended ID code 2 for analogue slaves with profile 7.4.x (→ page 149))
RFID identification system for writing and reading RFID tags
7 4 C
15-bit data + 1-bit messages (e.g. DTA100)
150
Ext.
IO code ID code
ID code 2 Meaning
[hex] [hex]
[hex]
7 A x slave operates in the "extended addressing mode" (B slave or A/B slave)
slave operates in the "extended addressing mode" (B slave or A/B slave)
7 A 5
combined slave; supports combined transaction type 2
7 A 7
4 binary inputs + 4 binary outputs
7 A 8
1 channel for combined transaction type 4
7 A 9
dual channel for combined transaction type 4
7 A A
slave operates in the "extended addressing mode" (B slave or A/B slave);
7 A E dual sensor with actuator interface (e.g. sensor AC2317);
7 B x safety slave with non-safe outputs
safety slave with non-safe outputs;
7 B 0
2 safe binary inputs (e.g. I/O module AC005S)
safety sensor with non-safe outputs;
2 safe binary inputs AND
7 B E
2 safe binary outputs AND
2 non-safe (relay) outputs (e.g. I/O module AC009S)
7 D x device for motor control (electromechanical)
7 D 0 electromechanical motor control with open sub-profile
7 D 1 electromechanical direct starter
7 D 2 electromechanical reverser
7 D 3 electromechanical direct starter with brake
7 D 4 electromechanical reverser with brake
7 D 5 electromechanical direct starter with accessories
7 D 6 electromechanical reverser with accessories
7 E x device for motor control (electronic)
7 E 0 electronic motor control with open sub-profile
7 E 1 electronic direct starter
7 E 2 electronic reverser
7 E 3 electronic direct starter with brake
7 E 4 electronic reverser with brake
7 E 5 electronic direct starter with accessories
7 E 6 electronic reverser with accessories
8 1 x 4 binary outputs for 2 dual-signal actuators
dual-signal actuator with feedback:
B 1 x
2 binary outputs + 2 binary inputs
B A 5
supports combined transaction type 2
B A E
2 binary outputs + 2 binary inputs (e.g. AC2086 module)
151
Ext.
IO code ID code
ID code 2 Meaning
[hex] [hex]
[hex]
single actuator with monitoring:
D 1 x
1 binary output + 3 binary inputs
x = any value (0...F)

Devices with M4 master profile enable connection of slaves with more than 4 digital inputs/outputs.
The transmission is combined: Part of the data transmission is carried out via the digital bits D0...D3,
another part via the "analogue" channels.
The more data is transmitted, the longer it takes until all data of a slave has been transmitted.
Cycle time single slave = 5 ms
Cycle time A/B slave (if address is only assigned to A or B slave) = 5 ms
Cycle time A/B slave (if address is assigned to A and B slave) = 10 ms
The cycle time for CTT transmission is a multiple of these values for individual data.
CTT = Combined Transaction Type
152
>
Slave profiles for slaves with combined transaction

5362
Structure slave profile = S-[IO-Code].[ID-Code].[ext.ID-Code2]
Slave Master Assignment analogue channels in the Bits Additional Combined

profile profile device D0…D3 acyclic string transaction
data CTT
Number of Use analogue / digital transaction
channels
1I 2/3/4 x 4 binary inputs

S-6.0 M4 and and –– no type 5
1O 2/3/4 x 4 binary outputs
1/2/4 I 1/2/4 analogue inputs
S-7.3 M3 or or –– no type 1
1/2/4 O 1/2/4 binary outputs
1/2/4 I 1/2/4 analogue inputs 4 inputs
S-7.4 M3 or or or yes type 1
1/2/4 O 1/2/4 binary outputs 4 outputs
0…4 analogue inputs
or
0…4 I < 65 binary inputs 2 inputs
S-7.5.5 M4 and and and yes type 2
0…4 O 0…4 analogue outputs 2 outputs
or
< 65 binary outputs
or
0…2 I < 33 binary inputs 2 inputs
S-7.A.5 M4 and and and yes type 2
0…2 O 0…2 analogue outputs 1 output
or
< 33 binary outputs
4 inputs
S-7.A.7 M4 –– –– and no type 3
4 outputs
1 analogue input
S-7.A.8 M4 1I or 1 output no type 4
< 17 binary inputs
2 analogue inputs
S-7.A.9 M4 2I or –– no type 4
< 33 binary inputs
1I 8 binary inputs
S-7.A.A M4 and and –– no type 3
1O 8 binary outputs
or
0…2 I < 33 binary inputs
S-B.A.5 M4 and and –– yes type 2
0…2 O 0…2 analogue outputs
or
< 33 binary outputs
Legend colour pattern:
binary inputs binary outputs analogue inputs analogue outputs
>
Combined transaction – Use of analogue channels in the gateway depending on the slave profile
5366
153
Number Analogue input channels Analogue output channels

Slave Slave
Transaction channel
profile type
s CH3 CH2 CH1 CH0 Trans CH3 CH2 CH1 CH0 Trans
CTT5 6.0.x S 1 – – – b – – – – b –
7.3.C S 1 – – – a – – – – – –
7.3.D S 2 – – a a – – – – – –
7.3.E S 4 a a a a – – – – – –
7.3.4 S 1 – – – – – – – – a –
7.3.5 S 2 – – – – – – – a a –
7.3.6 S 4 – – – – – a a a a –
CTT1
7.3.C S 1 – – – a – – – – – –
7.3.D S 2 – – a a – – – – – –
7.3.E S 4 a a a a – – – – – –
7.3.4 S 1 – – – – – – – – a –
7.3.5 S 2 – – – – – – – a a –
7.3.6 S 4 – – – – – a a a a –
7.4.4 S 1 – – – – – – – – a X
7.4.5 S 2 – – – – – – – a a X
7.4.6 S 4 – – – – – a a a a X
CTT1
7.4.C S 1 – – – a X – – – – –
7.4.D S 2 – – a a X – – – – –
7.4.E S 4 a a a a X – – – – –
CTT2 7.5.5 S 0…4 a b a b a b a b X a b a b a b a b X
7.A.5 A 0…2 – – a b a b X – – a b a b X
CTT2
7.A.5 B 0…2 a b a b – – X a b a b – – X
A – – –
CTT3 7.A.7 only binary only binary
B – – –
A 1 – – – a b – – – – – –
CTT4 7.A.8
B 1 – a b – – – – – – – –
A 2 – – a b a b – – – – – –
CTT4 7.A.9
B 2 a b a b – – – – – – – –
A 1 – – – b – – – – b –
CTT3 7.A.A
B 1 – b – – – – b – – –
B.A.5 A 0…2 – – a b a b X – – a b a b X
CTT2
B.A.5 B 0…2 a b a b – – X a b a b – – X
CHn = channel S = single slave a = analogue inputs/outputs (word) X = additional acyclic transaction of
Trans. = transparent A = A slave b = binary inputs/outputs (bits) strings for device, parameters,
mode B = B slave – = not used diagnosis
Legend colour pattern:
binary inputs binary outputs analogue inputs analogue outputs
154
Appendix Fieldbus EtherNet/IP
>
8.7 Fieldbus EtherNet/IP
Fieldbus objects ....................................................................................................................................156

Fieldbus parameters .............................................................................................................................158
Device-specific parameters ..................................................................................................................159
Cyclic data ............................................................................................................................................181
Acyclic data ..........................................................................................................................................217
Configuration mode ..............................................................................................................................335
13070
The Ethernet Industrial Protocol (EtherNet/IP) is a fieldbus system for industrial process
communication in the automation technology. It extends the Ethernet standard by the object-oriented
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) as application layer.
The following tables shows the main features of the EtherNet/IP:
Topology  star, tree, line
 Recommendation: Switched Ethernet
Connection technology  Standard Ethernet cable and connector

 Screened 10/100 Mbit/s TX Ethernet cable
 RJ45, M12
Transmission rate 10, 100 MBits

Transmission modes  cyclic and acyclic
→ www.odva.org (umbrella organisation)
155
>
8.7.1 Fieldbus objects

12947
EtherNet/IP is based on the Common Industrial Protocol (CIP). CIP encloses services and applications
in so-called object classes. Each object class has certain features (attributes) and defined interfaces
which can be used to access the functions of the object instance.
The AC142n uses the following object classes:
 Assembly instance objects for the transmission of
 device and EtherNet/IP parameters (→ Parameter data (→ page 156))
 Cyclic process data, diagnostic data (→ Cyclic data (→ page 156))
 Manufacturer-specific objects for the transmission of acyclic data (→ Acyclic data (→ page 157))
>
Parameter data
12620
The paramater data is transfered via the Configuration Assembly Object:
Object Instance Attribute Content Access max.

class [dec] [dec] r = read no. of
[dec] w = write words
4 175 3 Parameter data (module configuration, device-specific parameters) r/w 122
>
156
Cyclic data
17451
Cyclic data is transferred in dynamic assembly objects:

4 100 3 Cyclic data from AC142n to the I/O scanner (EtherNet/IP slots 1, 3, 5, r max.
7, 9, 10, 13, 14) 248
4 150 3 Cyclic data from the I/O scanner to AC142n (EtherNet/IP slots 2, 4, 6, r/w max.
8, 11, 12, 15) 248
>
Acyclic data
17548
Acyclic data is transferred in manufacturer-specific objects:

801 1 1 Acyclic data sets (system) r 248

32 ... 47 Acyclic data sets (AS-i master 1) r/w* 248
64 ... 79 Acyclic data sets (AS-i master 2) r/w* 248
801 1 30 Command request channel, system r/w 248
31 Command reply channel, system r 248
801 1 62 Command request channel, AS-i master 1 r/w 248
63 Command reply channel, AS-i master 1 r 248
801 1 94 Command request channel, AS-i master 2 r/w 248
95 Command reply channel, AS-i master 2 r 248
* ... depends on acyclic data set (→ Overview: Acyclic data sets (→ page 221))
157
>
8.7.2 Fieldbus parameters

17999
The fieldbus parameters provide information for the integration of the device into the EtherNet/IP
network. The fieldbus parameters are set directly on the device.
Parameter Meaning Value range
IP address IP address (IPv4) of the device's e.g.: 192.168.0.200

EtherNet/IP interface
Subnet mask Subnet mask of the EtherNet/IP e.g.: 255.255.255.0
network segment
Gateway address IP address (IPv4) of the EtherNet/IP e.g.: 192.168.0.100
gateway
158
>
8.7.3 Device-specific parameters
Parameters: Independent mode ...........................................................................................................160

Parameters: Top-down mode ...............................................................................................................161
Parameter setting via the configuration assembly object .....................................................................163
EDS-file.................................................................................................................................................180
12788
The device-specific parameters allow you to make individual adjustments to the system. Depending on
the selected configuration mode, the following parameters are available.
159
>
Parameters: Independent mode

11058
Parameter Description Value range

Analogue channels per input slave Number of analogue channels 4 channels* = 4 channels
per input slave (variable slave assignment)
2 channels = 2 channels
(fixed slave assignment)
1 channel = 1 channel
1 channel per 1 channel per A/B slave
A/B slave = (fixed slave assignment)
Analogue channels per output slave Number of analogue channels 4 channels* = 4 channels
per output slave (variable slave assignment)
Fail-safe state Behaviour of the slave outputs if Reset All AS-i outputs are switched off in
an interrupted fieldbus outputs* = case of an interrupted EtherNet/IP
connection is detected connection (value = 0).
Hold outputs = The outputs are held in the last valid
state that existed before the
interrupted connection was
detected.
Change byte order Byte order in a word Disabled* = Byte order in word remains
unchanged.
Setting applies to all data of
object class 4, instances 100 Enabled = Byte order in word is inverted.
and 150
* ... Default setting
In the 'Independent' configuration mode, the device-specific parameters are configured via the
GUI of the device (→ Configuration mode: Independent (→ page 341)).
160
>
Parameters: Top-down mode

12792

Analogue channels per input slave Number of analogue channels 4 channels* = 4 channels
per input slave (variable slave assignment)
Analogue channels per output slave Number of analogue channels 4 channels* = 4 channels
per output slave (variable slave assignment)
Modify slave order analogue IN Order of analogue input slaves Disabled* = The order of slaves remains
can be changed unchanged (basic setting).
Enabled = The order of slaves can be changed
(parameters in the following row).
1st analogue IN slave (slot 9) Assignment of analogue inputSlave 1 AS-i master 1
... slaves 1 to 15 of AS-i Slave 2 AS-i master 1
15th analogue IN slave (slot 9) master 1/2 to AS-i slave ...
1st analogue IN slave (slot 10) addresses Slave 31 AS-i master 1
... Slave 1 AS-i master 2
These settings are only Slave 2 AS-i master 2
15th analogue IN slave (slot 10) effective if parameters ...
Analogue channels per input Slave 31 AS-i master 2
slave = 4 channels and
Modify slave order analogue
IN = Enabled
Modify slave order analogue OUT Order of analogue output slaves Disabled = The order of slaves remains
can be changed unchanged (basic setting).
Enabled = The order of slaves can be changed
(parameters in the following row).
1st analogue OUT slave (slot 11) Assignment of analogue output Slave 1 AS-i master 1
... slaves 1 to 15 of AS-i Slave 2 AS-i master 1
15th analogue OUT slave (slot 11) master 1/2 to AS-i slave ...
1st analogue OUT slave (slot 12) addresses Slave 31 AS-i master 1
... Slave 1 AS-i master 2
These parameters are only Slave 2 AS-i master 2
15th analogue OUT slave (slot 12) effective if parameters ...
Analogue channels per out Slave 31 AS-i master 2*
slave = 4 channels and
Modify slave order analogue
OUT = Enabled
Fail-safe state Behaviour of the slave outputs if Reset All AS-i outputs are switched off in
an interrupted fieldbus outputs* = case of an interrupted Profinet
connection is detected connection (value = 0).
Hold outputs = The outputs are held in the last valid
state that existed before the
interrupted connection was
detected.
161

Change byte order Change byte order in a word Disabled* = Byte order in a word remains
unchanged.
Setting applies to all data of
object class 4, instances 100 Enabled = Byte order in a word is inverted.
and 150
AS-i parameter download Transmission of AS-i slave Disabled* = The following AS-i parameter data
parameters from host to is NOT sent to the AS-i system.
AC142n
Enabled* = The following AS-i parameter data
is sent to the AS-i system.
Param. slave 1(A) AS-i master 1 Parameters P3...P0 of the P3...P0 = 0x0 (= 0b0000)
… individual AS-i slaves ...
Param. slave 31(A) AS-i master 1 P3...P0 = 0xF (= 0b1111) for single slaves*
Param. slave 1B AS-i master 1 P3...P0 = 0x7 (= 0b0111) for A/B slaves*
…
Param. slave 31B AS-i master 1
Param. slave 1(A) AS-i master 2
…
Param. slave 31(A) AS-i master 2
…
* ... Default settings
In 'Top-down' configuration mode, the device-specific parameters are set via the fieldbus
projection software (→ Configuration mode: Top-down (→ page 336)).
162
>
Parameter setting via the configuration assembly object
Device-specific parameters ..................................................................................................................164

Parameters of the fieldbus slots ...........................................................................................................174
Derivation of parameter values for free slave assignment ...................................................................180
12810
In → Configuration mode: Top-down (→ page 336), the parameter data are set in the EtherNet/IP
projection software (→ Configuration mode: Top-down (→ page 336)). By means of the configuration
assembly object, the configuration is then transferred to the device and activated.
Only when a connection is established by the I/O scanner will the parameter data configured
via the configuration assembly object be transferred to the device. Changes to the parameter
data in the online mode of the controller will therefore only become effective after the next
connection.
To trigger a new connection setup, perform one of the following actions:
 Reboot the device
 Perform a system reset (→ System reset (→ page 86))
 Briefly interrupt the EtherNet/IP connection between the I/O scanner and the device
 Transfer the project from the higher-level controller to the device (download)
 Restart the I/O scanner
The configuration in top-down mode includes the following parameters:

 Parameters of the fieldbus slots (→ page 174)
 Device-specific parameters (→ page 164)
163
>
Device-specific parameters
12812
Data points in the Possible Default values Description

configuration assembly setting values when using EDS
[hex] file
with EDS witho AC1421 AC1422

ut
EDS
C.Failsafe state n=60 00 X X Reset AS-i outputs

01 Hold AS-i outputs
C.Swap byteorder n=61 00 X X deactivated
01 activated
C.Analogue n=62 01 1 channel
channels IN
02 2 channels
04 X X 4 channels
0B 1 channel per A/B
C.Analogue n=63 01 1 channel
channels OUT
02 2 channels
04 X X 4 channels
0B 1 channel per A/B

C.Analogue IN n=64 00 X X deactivated
order 1
01 activated
C.1st analogue IN n=65 41 ... 5F AS-i 1 slave 1... 31
Slot 9 2 41 41
81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1... 31
C.2nd analogue IN n=66 41 ... 5F AS-i 1 slave 1, 2 ... 31
Slot 9 2 42 42
81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1... 31
C.3rd analogue IN n=67 41 ... 5F AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 3 ... 31
Slot 9 2 43 43
81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31
C.4th analogue IN n=68 41 ... 5F AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 4 ... 31
Slot 9 2 44 44
81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31
Slot 9 2 45 45
81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31
Slot 9 2 46 46
81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1... 31
C.7th analogue IN n=71 41 ... 5F AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 7 .... 31

Slot 9 2 47 47
81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31
C.8th analogue IN n=72 41 ... 5F AS-i 1 slave 1 .. 8 ... 31
Slot 9 2 48 48
81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31
Slot 9 2 49 49
81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31
Slot 9 2 4A 4A
81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31
164

[hex] file

ut
EDS

Slot 9 2 4B 4B
81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31
Slot 9 2 4C 4D
81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31
Slot 9 2 4D 4D
81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31
Slot 9 2 4E 4E
81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31
Slot 9 2 4F 4F
81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31
C.1st analogue IN n=80 41 ... 5F AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31
Slot 10 2 81 81
81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31
C.2nd analogue IN n=81 41 ... 5F AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31
Slot 10 2 82 82
81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1, 2 ... 31
C.3rd analogue IN n=82 41 ... 5F AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31

Slot 10 2 83 83
81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 3 ... 31
C.4th analogue IN n=83 41 ... 5F AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31
Slot 10 2 84 84
81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 4 ... 31
Slot 10 2 85 85
81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 5 ... 31
Slot 10 2 86 86
81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 6 ... 31
Slot 10 2 87 87
81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 7 ... 31

Slot 10 2 88 88
81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 8 ... 31
Slot 10 2 89 89
81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 9 ... 31

Slot 10 2 8A 8A
81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 10 ... 31

Slot 10 2 8B 8B
81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 11 ... 31
Slot 10 2 8C 8C
81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 12 ... 31

Slot 10 2 8D 8D
81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 13 ... 31
C.14th analogue IN n=93 41 ... 5F 8E 8E AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31
165

[hex] file

ut
EDS
Slot 10 2 81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 14 ... 31
Slot 10 2 8F 8F
81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 15 ... 31
C.Analogue OUT n=95 00 X X deactivated
order 1
01 activated
C.1st analogue OUT n=96 41 ... 5F AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 16 ...31
Slot 11 3 50 50
81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31
C.2nd analogue n=97 41 ... 5F AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 17 ...31
OUT 51 51
Slot 11 3 81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31
C.3rd analogue OUT n=98 41 ... 5F AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 18 ...31

Slot 11 3 52 52
81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31
C.4th analogue OUT n=99 41 ... 5F AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 19 ...31
Slot 11 3 53 53
81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31
Slot 11 3 54 54
81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31
Slot 11 3 55 55
81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31
C.7th analogue OUT n=102 41 ... 5F AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 22 ... 31
Slot 11 3 56 56
81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31
Slot 11 3 57 57
81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31
Slot 11 3 58 58
81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31
C.10th analogue n=105 41 ... 5F AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 25 ...31
OUT slot 11 3 59 59
81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31
OUT slot 11 3 5A 5A
81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31
OUT slot 11 3 5B 5B
81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31
OUT slot 11 3 5C 5C
81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31
OUT slot 11 3 5D 5D
81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31
C.15th analogue n=110 41 ... 5F AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 30, 31
OUT slot 11 3 5E 5E
81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31
C.1st analogue OUT n=111 41 ... 5F AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31
Slot 12 3 91 91
81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 16 ... 31
166

[hex] file

ut
EDS
C.2nd analogue n=112 41 ... 5F AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31

OUT 92 92
Slot 12 3 81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 17 ... 31
C.3rd analogue OUT n=113 41 ... 5F AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31

Slot 12 3 93 93
81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 18 ... 31
C.4th analogue OUT n=114 41 ... 5F AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31

Slot 12 3 94 94
81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 19 ... 31

slot 12 3 95 95
81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 20 ... 31

slot 12 3 96 96
81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 21 ... 31

slot 12 3 97 97
81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 22 ... 31
slot 12 3 98 98
81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 23 ... 31

slot 12 3 99 99
81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 24 ... 31
C.10th analogue n=120 41 ... 5F AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31
OUT slot 12 3 9A 9A
81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 25 ... 31
OUT slot 12 3 9B 9B
81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 26 ... 31
OUT slot 12 3 9B 9B
81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 27 ... 31

OUT slot 12 3 9C 9C
81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 28 ... 31

OUT slot 12 3 9D 9D
81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 29 ... 31
OUT slot 12 3 9E 9E
81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 30, 31
C.AS-i Parameter n=126 00 X X deactivated

Download 1
01 activated
C.Parameter slave n=127 00 ... 0F 0F 0F Parameter for AS-i slave 1(A)
1(A) AS-i 1 4
C.Parameter slave n=128 00 ... 0F 0F 0F Parameter for AS-i 1 slave 2(A)
2(A) AS-i 1 4
3(A) AS-i 1 4
4(A) AS-i 1 4
167

[hex] file

ut
EDS

5(A) AS-i 1 4
6(A) AS-i 1 4
7(A) AS-i 1 4
8(A) AS-i 1 4
9(A) AS-i 1 4
10(A) AS-i 1 4
11(A) AS-i 1 4
12(A) AS-i 1 4
13(A) AS-i 1 4
14(A) AS-i 1 4
C.Parameter slave n=141 00 ... 0F 0F 0F Parameter for AS-i slave 15(A)
15(A) AS-i 1 4
16(A) AS-i 1 4
17(A) AS-i 1 4
18(A) AS-i 1 4
19(A) AS-i 1 4
20(A) AS-i 1 4
21(A) AS-i 1 4
22(A) AS-i 1 4
23(A) AS-i 1 4
24(A) AS-i 1 4
25(A) AS-i 1 4
26(A) AS-i 1 4
27(A) AS-i 1 4
168

[hex] file

ut
EDS

28(A) AS-i 1 4
29(A) AS-i 1 4
30(A) AS-i 1 4
31(A) AS-i 1 4
C.Parameter slave n=158 00 ... 0F 07 07 Parameter for AS-i 1 slave 1B
1B AS-i 1 4
2B AS-i 1 4
3B AS-i 1 4
4B AS-i 1 4
5B AS-i 1 4
6B AS-i 1 4
7B AS-i 1 4 4
8B AS-i 1 4
9B AS-i 1 4
10B AS-i 1 4
11B AS-i 1 4
12B AS-i 1 4
13B AS-i 1 4
14B AS-i 1 4
15B AS-i 1 4
16B AS-i 1 4
17B AS-i 1 4
18B AS-i 1 4
19B AS-i 1 4
169

[hex] file

ut
EDS

20B AS-i 1 4
21B AS-i 1 4
22B AS-i 1 4
23B AS-i 1 4
24B AS-i 1 4
25B AS-i 1 4
26B AS-i 1 4
27B AS-i 1 4
28B AS-i 1 4
29B AS-i 1 4
30B AS-i 1 4
31B AS-i 1 4
1(A) AS-i 2 4
2(A) AS-i 2 4
3(A) AS-i 2 4
4(A) AS-i 2 4
5(A) AS-i 2 4
6(A) AS-i 2 4
7(A) AS-i 2 4
8(A) AS-i 2 4
9(A) AS-i 2 4
10(A) AS-i 2 4
11(A) AS-i 2 4
170

[hex] file

ut
EDS

12(A) AS-i 2 4
13(A) AS-i 2 4
14(A) AS-i 2 4
15(A) AS-i 2 4
16(A) AS-i 2 4
17(A) AS-i 2 4
18(A) AS-i 2 4
19(A) AS-i 2 4
20(A) AS-i 2 4
21(A) AS-i 2 4
22(A) AS-i 2 4
23(A) AS-i 2 4
24(A) AS-i 2 4
25(A) AS-i 2 4
26(A) AS-i 2 4
27(A) AS-i 2 4
28(A) AS-i 2 4
29(A) AS-i 2 4
30(A) AS-i 2 4
31(A) AS-i 2 4
1B AS-i 2 4
2B AS-i 2 4
3B AS-i 2 4
171

[hex] file

ut
EDS

4B AS-i 2 4
5B AS-i 2 4
6B AS-i 2 4
7B AS-i 2 4
8B AS-i 2 4
9B AS-i 2 4
10B AS-i 2 4
11B AS-i 2 4
12B AS-i 2 4
13B AS-i 2 4
14B AS-i 2 4
15B AS-i 2 4
16B AS-i 2 4
17B AS-i 2 4
18B AS-i 2 4
19B AS-i 2 4
20B AS-i 2 4
21B AS-i 2 4
22B AS-i 2 4
23B AS-i 2 4
24B AS-i 2 4
25B AS-i 2 4
26B AS-i 2 4
172

[hex] file

ut
EDS

27B AS-i 2 4
28B AS-i 2 4
29B AS-i 2 4
30B AS-i 2 4
31B AS-i 2 4
Legend:
1 = Free slave assignment only possible in top-down mode.
2 = Parameter can only be set if [C.analogue IN order] = 01 and [C.Analogue channels IN] = 4 channels
3 = Parameter can only be set if [C.analogue OUT order] = 01 and [C.Analogue channels OUT] = 4 channels
4 = Parameter can only be set if [C.AS-i param. download] = 01
173
>
Parameters of the fieldbus slots

12811
NOTICE
Risk of data loss!
Slot Data points in Possible setting values Default values Description

the configuration [hex] when using EDS
[dec] assembly file
with without n+3 n+2 n+1 n AC1421 AC1422

EDS EDS
1 C.Slot1 n=0 00 00 00 00 Empty module
00 00 10 02 1: digital IN AS-i 1, Slaves 01(A) ... 03(A)
00 00 10 0A 1: digital IN AS-i 1, Slaves 01(A) ... 19(A)
00 00 10 0C 1: digital IN AS-i 1, Slaves 01(A) ... 23(A)
00 00 10 0E 1: digital IN AS-i 1, Slaves 01(A) ... 27(A)
00 00 10 10 X X 1: digital IN AS-i 1, Slaves 01(A) ... 31(A)
00 00 20 02 2: digital OUT AS-i 1, Slaves 01(A) ... 03(A)


00 00 20 0A 2: digital OUT AS-i 1, Slaves 01(A) ... 19(A)
00 00 20 0C 2: digital OUT AS-i 1, Slaves 01(A) ... 23(A)
00 00 20 0E 2: digital OUT AS-i 1, Slaves 01(A) ... 27(A)
00 00 20 10 X X 2: digital OUT AS-i 1, Slaves 01(A) ... 31(A)
3 C.Slot3 n=8 00 00 00 00 X Empty module
174

[dec] assembly file

EDS EDS
00 02 10 0A 3: digital IN AS-i 2, Slaves 01(A) ... 19(A)
00 02 10 0C 3: digital IN AS-i 2, Slaves 01(A) ... 23(A)
00 02 10 0E 3: digital IN AS-i 2, Slaves 01(A) ... 27(A)
00 02 10 10 X 3: digital IN AS-i 2, Slaves 01(A) ... 31(A)

00 02 20 0A 4: digital OUT AS-i 2, Slaves 01(A) ... 19(A)
00 02 20 0C 4: digital OUT AS-i 2, Slaves 01(A) ... 23(A)
00 02 20 0E 4: digital OUT AS-i 2, Slaves 01(A) ... 27(A)
00 02 20 10 X 4: digital OUT AS-i 2, Slaves 01(A) ... 31(A)
00 01 10 02 5: digital IN AS-i 1, Slaves 01B ... 03B

00 01 10 0A 5: digital IN AS-i 1, Slaves 01B ... 19B
00 01 10 0C 5: digital IN AS-i 1, Slaves 01B ... 23B
00 01 10 0E 5: digital IN AS-i 1, Slaves 01B ... 27B
00 01 10 10 X X 5: digital IN AS-i 1, Slaves 01B ... 31B
00 01 20 02 6: digital OUT AS-i 1, Slaves 01B ... 03B

00 01 20 0A 6: digital OUT AS-i 1, Slaves 01B ... 19B
00 01 20 0C 6: digital OUT AS-i 1, Slaves 01B ... 23B
00 01 20 0E 6: digital OUT AS-i 1, Slaves 01B ... 27B
00 01 20 10 X X 6: digital OUT AS-i 1, Slaves 01B ... 31B
175

[dec] assembly file

EDS EDS
00 03 10 0A 7: digital IN AS-i 2, Slaves 01B ... 19B
00 03 10 0C 7: digital IN AS-i 2, Slaves 01B ... 23B
00 03 10 0E 7: digital IN AS-i 2, Slaves 01B ... 27B
00 03 10 10 X 7: digital IN AS-i 2, Slaves 01B ... 31B

00 03 20 0A 8: digital OUT AS-i 2, Slaves 01B ... 19B
00 03 20 0C 8: digital OUT AS-i 2, Slaves 01B ... 23B
00 03 20 0E 8: digital OUT AS-i 2, Slaves 01B ... 27B
00 03 20 10 X 8: digital OUT AS-i 2, Slaves 01B ... 31B
00 00 50 08 9: analog IN range 1, 04 words



00 00 50 78 X X 9: analog IN range 1, 60 words
0

176

[dec] assembly file

EDS EDS
00 00 50 78 X 10: analog IN range 2, 60 words
1
00 00 60 08 11: analog OUT range 1, 04 words


00 00 60 78 X X 11: analog OUT range 1, 60 words
2


177

[dec] assembly file

EDS EDS
00 00 60 78 X 12: analog OUT range 2, 60 words
3
00 00 D0 32 X 13: AC1421 (25 words)
00 02 D0 64 X 13: AC1422 (50 words)
00 00 D0 1A 13: AC13x7 AS-i 1 (13 words)

00 02 D0 34 13: AC13x7 AS-i 1+2 (26 words)
14 C.Slot1 n=52 00 00 00 00 X X Empty module

4
00 04 10 08 14: Inputs from AC142n-PLC, 4 words

00 04 10 B8 14: Inputs from AC142n-PLC, 92 words
178

[dec] assembly file

EDS EDS
00 04 10 D8 14: Inputs from AC142n-PLC, 108 words
00 04 10 F0 14: Inputs from AC142n-PLC, 120 words
15 C.Slot1 n=56 00 00 00 00 X X Empty module

5
00 04 20 08 15: Outputs to AC142n-PLC, 4 words

00 04 20 B8 15: Outputs to AC142n-PLC, 92 words
00 04 20 D8 15: Outputs to AC142n-PLC, 108 words
00 04 20 F0 15: Outputs to AC142n-PLC, 120 words
179
>
Derivation of parameter values for free slave assignment

17744
The following table shows the derivation of parameter values for a free assignment of slaves within the
analogue areas.
A free assignment of analogue slaves in slots 9...12 can only be applied if the parameters
[C.Analogue channels IN] and [C.Analogue channels OUT] are set to the value 4 channels!
Byte
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

AS-i 2 AS-i 1 Reserved Slave address (1...31)
Legend:
Master:  AS-i master 1 = 0x40
 AS-i master 2 = 0x80
Slave:  Slave 1 = 0x01
...
 Slave 31 = 0x1F
Derivation: byte value = master + slave (→ Examples (→ page 180))
>
Examples
17745
Byte
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

1 0 0 0x02
= 0x82 = AS-i master 2, slave 2
0 1 0 0x1F
= 0x5F = AS-i master 1, slave 31
>
EDS-file
12789
The EDS file (Electronic Data Sheet)is used to easily integrate the AC142n in a fieldbus projecting
software. The EDS supplies a profile of the fieldbus device in form of an ASCII file. It describes all
features of the device such as communication parameters and objects.
The EDS file is saved in the device. It can be downloaded directly to the configuration PC via the web
interface (→ Download the device and I/O description (→ page 95)).
180
>
8.7.4 Cyclic data

12417
The cyclic process data are updated through the fieldbus mechanisms at regular intervals. They
belong to the category of implicit messaging (→ Implicit Messaging (→ page 354)) and are therefore
real-time capable.
Slots combine the process data of several AS-i slaves. The following tables show the available
EtherNet/IP modules.
The user must set the content and length of the cyclically transmitted data either at the
device (→ Configuration mode: Independent (→ page 341)) or in the EtherNet/IP
projection software by means the configuration assembly object (→ Configuration mode:
Top-down (→ page 336), → Parameter setting via the configuration assembly object
(→ page 163)).
181
>
EtherNet/IP modules
12419
NOTICE
Risk of data loss!
Slot Description Further information
1 Digital input data single or A slaves, AS-i master 1 → Slot 1 – Digital input data single or A slaves, AS-i master 1
(→ page 183)
2 Digital output data single or A slaves, AS-i master 1 → Slot 2 – Digital output data single or A slaves, AS-i master 1
(→ page 183)
3 Digital input data single or A slaves, AS-i master 2 → Slot 3 – Digital input data single or A slaves, AS-i master 2
(only available for devices with 2 AS-i masters) (→ page 184)
4 Digital output data single or A slaves, AS-i master 2 → Slot 4 – Digital output data single or A slaves, AS-i master 2
5 Digital input data B slaves, AS-i master 1 → Slot 5 – Digital input data B slaves, AS-i master 1
(→ page 185)
6 Digital output data B slaves, AS-i master 1 → Slot 6 – Digital output data B slaves, AS-i master 1
(→ page 185)
7 Digital input data B slaves, AS-i master 2 → Slot 7 – Digital input data B slaves, AS-i master 2
8 Digital output data B slaves, AS-i master 2 → Slot 8 – Digital output data B slaves, AS-i master 2
9 Analogue input data of up to 31 slaves, range 1* → Slot 9 – Analogue input data (→ page 189)
10 Analogue input data of up to 31 slaves, range 2* → Slot 10 – Analogue input data (→ page 190)
11 Analogue output data of up to 31 slaves, range 1** → Slot 11 – Analogue output data (→ page 191)
12 Analogue output data of up to 31 slaves, range 2** → Slot 12 – Analogue output data (→ page 192)
13 Diagnostic data → Slot 13 – Diagnostic data (→ page 197)
14 Data from the device-internal PLC to the EtherNet/IP → Slot 14 – Inputs from PLC (→ page 215)
PLC
15 Data from the EtherNet/IP PLC to the device-internal → Slot 15 – Outputs to PLC (→ page 216)
PLC
* ... Define the number of analogue channels and the slave number by means of the device parameters [analogue
channels/I-slave] (→ Device-specific parameters (→ page 159)).
** ... Define the number of analogue channels and the slave number by means of the device parameters [analogue
channels/O-slave] (→ Device-specific parameters (→ page 159)).
182
>
Slot 1 – Digital input data single or A slaves, AS-i master 1

12428
Slot Description Value range Length

[words]
1 Digital input data of single or Empty module = Module is disabled 0
A slaves, connected to AS-i
master 1 01 ... 03 = Module is active with slaves 1(A) ... 3(A), AS-i master 1 1
01 ... 07 = Module is active with slaves 1(A) ... 7(A), AS-i master 1 2
01 ... 27 = Module is active with slaves 1(A) ...27(A), AS-i master 1 7
The data of 4 AS-i slaves is transmitted in each word (→ Mapping of the digital input/output data
(→ page 187)).
>
Slot 2 – Digital output data single or A slaves, AS-i master 1

12429

[words]
2 Digital output data of single Empty module = Module is disabled 0
or A slaves, connected to
AS-i master 1 01 ... 03 = Module is active with slaves 1(A) ... 3(A), AS-i master 1 1
(→ page 187)).
183
>
Slot 3 – Digital input data single or A slaves, AS-i master 2

12430

[words]
3 Digital input data of single or Empty module = Module is disabled 0
A slaves, connected to AS-i
master 2 01 ... 03 = Module is active with slaves 1(A) ... 3(A), AS-i master 2 1
(only available for devices
with 2 AS-i masters)
(→ page 187)).
>
Slot 4 – Digital output data single or A slaves, AS-i master 2

12431

[words]
4 Digital output data of single Empty module = Module is disabled 0
or A slaves, connected to
AS-i master 2 01 ... 03 = Module is active with slaves 1(A) ... 3(A), AS-i master 2 1
(→ page 187)).
184
>
Slot 5 – Digital input data B slaves, AS-i master 1

12433

[words]
5 Digital input data of B Empty module = Module is disabled 0
slaves, connected to AS-i
master 1 01B ... 03B = Module is active with slaves 1B ... 3B, AS-i master 1 1
01B ... 07B = Module is active with slaves 1B ... 7B, AS-i master 1 2
(→ page 187)).
>
Slot 6 – Digital output data B slaves, AS-i master 1

12435

[words]
6 Digital output data of B Empty module = Module is disabled 0
(→ page 187)).
185
>
Slot 7 – Digital input data B slaves, AS-i master 2

12436

[words]
7 Digital input data of B Empty module = Module is disabled 0
(→ page 187)).
>
Slot 8 – Digital output data B slaves, AS-i master 2

12437

[words]
8 Digital output data of B Empty module = Module is disabled 0
01B ... 15B = Module is active with slaves 1B ... 15Bl, AS-i master 2 4
(→ page 187)).
186
>
Mapping of the digital input/output data

13447
This table illustrates the mapping of digital input/output data of the individual slaves to the bytes of the
transmitted words:
Word AS-i slave addresses
Bits Bits Bits Bits

15...12 11...8 7...4 3...0
1 M flags* 1(A) / 1B 2(A) / 2B 3(A) / 3B
2 4(A) / 4B 5(A) / 5B 6(A) / 6B 7(A) / 7B
3 8(A) / 8B 9(A) / 9B 10(A) / 10B 11(A) / 11B
4 12(A) / 12B 13(A) / 13B 14(A) / 14B 15(A) / 15B
5 16(A) / 16B 17(A) / 17B 18(A) / 18B 19(A) / 19B
6 20(A) / 20B 21(A) / 21B 22(A) / 22B 23(A) / 23B
7 24(A) / 24B 25(A) / 25B 26(A) / 26B 27(A) / 27B
8 28(A) / 28B 29(A) / 29B 30(A) / 30B 31(A) / 31B
Legend:
*
... The master flags (M flags) are only transmitted in the digital input data
(→ Table: Master flags (→ page 188)).
>
Example: structure of the digital input data

13450
Task:
The digital input data of slaves 1A, 3 and 6A of AS-i master 1 are to be transmitted.
Solution:
Slot: 1
Module configuration: 01 ... 07
Data length: 2 words
The following table shows in which positions of the two word sized data block the digital input data of
the slaves are transmitted:
Data block (2 words)
Bits Bits Bits Bits Bits Bits Bits Bits

31...28 27...24 23...20 19...16 15...12 11...8 7...4 3...0
1A 3 6A
187
>
Table: Master flags

12475
Bits 12...15 of the first word of the digital input data contain the master flags. They provide information
on the operating state of the AS-i master. The following table shows the meaning of each bit:
Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12
AS-i power fail Configuration error in the AS-i master is offline Periphery fault in the AS-i
(19 V) AS-i circuit (AS-i data is invalid) circuit
Possible values per bit:
0 = no error
1 = error
In the digital output data, bits 12...15 have no relevance and are not evaluated!
188
>
Slot 9 – Analogue input data

12438

[words]
9 Data area with a maximum Empty module = Module is deactivated 0
length of 60 words for cyclic
transmission of analogue 004 words = Module is activated with 4 analog channels 4
input information 008 words = Module is activated with 8 analog channels 8
Default setting: analogue
inputs of AS-i slaves 012 words = Module is activated with 12analog channels 12
01 ... 15, connected to AS-i
016 words = Module is activated with 16 analog channels 16
master 1
The valid and
overflow flags that each 024 words = Module is activated with 24 analog channels 24
analogue AS-i input slave
provides for each channel 028 words = Module is activated with 28 analog channels 28
are NOT represented here.
If required, they can be read
out via the acyclic services. 036 words = Module is activated with 36 analog channels 36
(→ The acyclic process data).
The exact mapping of analogue input data within this area depends on the parameter setting [Analog.
channels/I-slave] (→ Configuration of the analogue channels in slots 9 ... 12 (→ page 193)).
189
>
Slot 10 – Analogue input data

124390

[words]
input information 008 words = Module is activated with 8 analog channels 8
inputs of AS-i slaves 01.. 15, 012 words = Module is activated with 12 analog channels 12
connected to AS-i master 2
with 2 AS-i masters) 020 words = Module is activated with 20 analog channels 20
The valid and 024 words = Module is activated with 24 analog channels 24
overflow flags that each
analogue AS-i input slave 028 words = Module is activated with 28 analog channels 28
provides for each channel
are NOT represented here.
If required, they can be read 036 words = Module is activated with 36 analog channels 36
out via the acyclic services
(Explicit Messaging) 040 words =Module is activated with 40 analog channels 40
(→ The acyclic process data).
The exact mapping of analogue input data within this area depends on the parameter setting [Analog.
channels/I-slave] (→ Configuration of the analogue channels in slots 9 ... 12 (→ page 193)).
190
>
Slot 11 – Analogue output data

12440

[words]
output information. 008 words = Module is activated with 8 analog channels 8
outputs of AS-i slaves 012 words = Module is activated with 12 analog channels 12
16...30, connected to AS-i
master 1
The exact mapping of analogue output data within this area depends on the parameter setting
[Analog. channels/O-slave] (→ Configuration of the analogue channels in slots 9 ... 12 (→ page 193)).
191
>
Slot 12 – Analogue output data

12442

[words]
output information. 008 words = Module is activated with 8 analog channels 8
outputs of AS-i slaves 012 words = Module is activated with 12 analog channels 12
16...30, connected to AS-i
master 2
(only available for devices 020 words = Module is activated with 20 analog channels 20
The exact mapping of analogue output data within this area depends on the parameter setting
[Analog. channels/O-slave] (→ Configuration of the analogue channels in slots 9 ... 12 (→ page 193)).
192
>
Configuration of the analogue channels in slots 9 ... 12

12471
The configuration of the EtherNet/IP device parameters [Analog. channels/I-slave] and [Analog.
channels/O-slave] determines which analogue channels of the AS-i slaves are transmitted. The
following table shows the meaning of the adjustable parameter values:
Parameter values Description
4 channels Variable slave assignment

The analogue channels of max. 30 slave addresses are transferred:
single slaves: channels 1...4
or:
A slaves: channels 1+2 and
B slaves: channels 1+2
The device-specific parameters (→ Device-specific parameters (→ page 164)) of the device allow you to
individually define the order of 15 of the analogue slaves to be transferred, respectively (→ Table: variable
slave assignment for slots 9 ... 12 (→ page 196)). All available slave addresses of both AS-i masters can be
selected.
Preset, variable:
 for slot 9: AS-i master 1: single slaves 1 ... 15 or: slave 1A ... 15A, 1B ... 15B
 for slot 10: AS-i master 2: single slaves 1 ... 15 or: slave 1A ... 15A, 1B ... 15B
 for slot 11: AS-i master 1: single slaves 16 ... 30 or: slave 16A .... 30A, 15B ... 30B
 for slot 12: AS-i master 2: single slaves 16 ... 30 or: slave 16A .... 30A, 15B ... 30B
2 channels Fixed slave assignment
Of each transferring AS-i single and A address, the following analogue channels are transmitted:
of single slaves: channels 1+2
or:
of A slaves: channels 1+2
The slave assignment is fixed (→ Table: Fixed slave assignment for slots 9 ... 12 (→ page 194)). A
configuration of the slave order in the device-specific parameters is ineffective.
1 channel Fixed slave assignment
Of each transferring AS-i single and A address, the following analogue channels are transmitted:
single slaves: channel 1
or:
A slaves: channel 1
1 channel A/B-Slave Fixed slave assignment
Of each transferring slave address, the following analogue channels are transmitted:
single slaves: channels 1+3
or:
A slaves: channel 1 and B slaves: channel 1
193
>
Table: Fixed slave assignment for slots 9 ... 12

12472
Word Word content for the following number of analogue channels per input/output slave
2 channels 1 channel 1 channel A/B-Slave
1 Mx / slave 1(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 1(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 1(A) / Channel 1

2 Mx / slave 1(A) / Channel 2 Mx / slave 2(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 1B / Channel 1 = Mx / slave 1 / Channel 3
7 Mx / slave 4(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 7(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 4(A) / Channel 1 1
10 Mx / slave 5(A) / Channel 2 Mx / slave 10(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 5B /Channel 1 = Mx / slave 5 / Channel 3
30 Mx / slave 15(A) / Channel 2 Mx / slave 30(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 15B / Channel 1= Mx / slave 15 / Channel 3
31 Mx / slave 16(A) /Channel 1 Mx / slave 31(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 16(A) / Channel 1
32 Mx / slave 16(A) / Channel 2 Mx / slave 16B / Channel 1 = Mx / slave 16 / Channel 3
33 Mx / slave 17(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 17(A) / Channel 1
34 Mx / slave 17(A) / Channel 2 Mx / slave 17B / Channel 1= Mx / slave 17 / Channel 3
194

43 Mx / slave 22(A) /Channel 1 Mx / slave 22(A) / Channel 1
59 Mx / slave 30(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 30(A) /Channel 1
Legend:
x ... - slot 9 + 11: x=1 (M1 = AS-i master 1)
- slot 10 + 12: x=2 (M2 = AS-i master 2)
195
>
Table: variable slave assignment for slots 9 ... 12

13451
Word Content of transmitted word for parameter value 4 channels

offset no.
n Mx / slave m(A) / channel 1

n+1 Mx / slave m(A) / channel 2
n+2 Mx / slave m(A) / channel 1 = Mx / slave mB / channel 1
Legend:
n ... number of 4-word blocks
1 = if 4 words are set
...
15 = if 60 words are set
x ... 1 = AS-i master 1
2 = AS-i master 2
m ... numerical part of the selected AS-i slave address
Variable AS-i slave assignment is only possible in top-down mode. In the EtherNet/IP projection
software, each word can be assigned the data of an AS-i slave via the configuration assembly object.
Otherwise, the preset values apply (→ Configuration of the analogue channels in slots 9 ... 12
(→ page 193)).
To assign a specific AS-i slave address to the transferring channels:
► Open the project in the EtherNet/IP projection software.
► Make the following settings in the configuration assembly object:
 Activate the data point C.Analogue IN order (= 0x01).
 Assign the desired slave addresses to the input channels in the data points C.1st analogue IN Slot 9 to
C.15th analogue IN Slot 10.
 Activate the data point C. Analogue OUT order (= 0x01).
 Assign the desired slave addresses to the output channels in the data points C.1st analogue OUT Slot 11
... C.15th analogue OUT Slot 12 .
► Save the set values and transfer the project to the device (download).
196
>
Slot 13 – Diagnostic data

12470
Slot Data length

Description Value range
[words]
13 Diagnostic data sent to the I/O scanner Empty module 0

Contents of diagnostic data: → following tables AC1421 25
AC1422 50
AC13x7 AS-i 1 *) 13
AC13x7 AS-i 1+2 *) 26
Legend:
*) ... compatible with the diagnostic data of predecessor models AC1327/37
197
>
Module setting: AC1421

12624
The diagnostic data for the module settings AC1421 have 25 words.
Overview diagnostic range:
Word Description
1 System diagnosis
2...5 AS-i master 1: AS-i diagnosis
6...9 AS-i master 1: list of missing slaves
10...13 AS-i master 1: List of non-projected slaves
14...17 AS-i master 1: List of slaves with wrong slave profile
18...21 AS-i master 1: list of peripheral faults
22...25 AS-i master 1: list of multiple addressed slaves
198
>
Diagnosis - system diagnosis

12657
System diagnosis:
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 - - - - - - - - - - - - PS GI OT ISE
Legend:
Alarm Description
ISE Internal System Error Interner K6-Systemfehler
OT over temperature: temperature inside the device has exceeded the permissible max. temperature value
GI gateway inactive: the gateway mode was deactivated
PS PLC stop: The controller was stopped
199
>
Diagnosis - AS-i master 1: AS-i diagnosis

12658
AS-i master 1: AS-i diagnostics:

bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
PF22.
2 - - PF19 EF S0 PM IME - - - DAE PE CEIP CEAS CEMS
5
3 Voltage AS-i+ to AS-i- in mV
4 Voltage FE to AS-i- in mV
5 Symmetry in % (-100% ... +100%)

Legend:
Alarm Description
IME internal master error: Internal system error of an AS-i master
PM projection mode: AS-i master was set to the projection mode.
S0 slave 0 detected: New slave 0 was detected.
EF earth fault: Earth fault was detected
PF22.5 22.5V AS-i Power-Fail (classic AS-i Power) was detected.
PF19 19 AS-i Power-Fail (Power24) was detected.
CEMS Configuration Error – Missing Slave: AS-i configuration error, one or several slaves are projected, but not
available.
CEAS Configuration Error – Additional Slave: AS-i configuration error, one or several slaves are available, but
not projected.
CEIP Configuration Error – Invalid Profile: AS-i configuration error, the slave profiles of one or several slaves
differ from the projected slave profiles.
PE periphery error: One or several AS-i slaves have a periphery error.
DAE duplicate address error: One or several multiple-addressing faults occurred.
200
>
Diagnosis - AS-i master 1: List of missing slaves

2659
AS-i master 1: list of missing slaves:

bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
6 15(A) 14(A) 13(A) 12(A) 11(A) 10(A) 9(A) 8(A) 7(A) 6(A) 5(A) 4(A) 3(A) 2(A) 1(A) 0
7 31(A) 30(A) 29(A) 28(A) 27(A) 26(A) 25(A) 24(A) 23(A) 22(A) 21(A) 20(A) 19(A) 18(A) 17(A) 16(A)
8 15B 14B 13B 12B 11B 10B 9B 8B 7B 6B 5B 4B 3B 2B 1B n.a.
9 31B 30B 29B 28B 27B 26B 25B 24B 23B 22B 21B 20B 19B 18B 17B 16B
If at least 1 bit is set in this list, the bit for CEMS is also set.
(→ Diagnosis - AS-i master 1: AS-i diagnosis (→ page 200))
>
Diagnosis - AS-i master 1: List of non-projected slaves

12660
AS-i master 1: List of non-projected slaves:

bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
If at least 1 bit is set in this list, the bit for CEAS is also set.
>
Diagnosis - AS-i master 1: List of slaves with wrong slave profile

12663
AS-i master 1: List of slaves with wrong slave profile:

bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
If at least 1 bit is set in this list, the bit for CEIP is also set.
201
>
Diagnosis - AS-i master 1: List of peripheral faults

2664
AS-i master 1: list of peripheral faults:

bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
If at least 1 bit is set in this list, the bit for PE is also set.
>
Diagnosis - AS-i master 1: list of multiple addressed slaves

12665
AS-i master 1: list of multiple addressed slaves:

bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
If at least 1 bit is set in this list, the bit for DAE is also set.
(→ Diagnosis - AS-i master 1: AS-i diagnosis (→ page 200)).
202
>
Module setting: AC1422

2625
The diagnostic data for the module settings AC1422 have 50 words. Words 1 to 25 correspond to
those of the module setting AC1421 (→ Module setting: AC1421 (→ page 198)).
Word Description
1 System diagnosis
50 reserved
203
>
Diagnosis - system diagnosis

12738
→ Diagnosis - system diagnosis (→ page 199)

>

12739
→ Diagnosis - AS-i master 1: AS-i diagnosis (→ page 200)

>
Diagnosis - AS-i master 1: list of missing slaves

12740
→ Diagnosis - AS-i master 1: List of missing slaves (→ page 201)

>

12741
→ Diagnosis - AS-i master 1: List of non-projected slaves (→ page 201)

>

12742
→ Diagnosis - AS-i master 1: List of slaves with wrong slave profile (→ page 201)
>
Diagnosis - AS-i master 1: list of peripheral faults

12743
→ Diagnosis - AS-i master 1: List of peripheral faults (→ page 202)

>

12744
→ Diagnosis - AS-i master 1: list of multiple addressed slaves (→ page 202)
204
>

12730

bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
PF22.
26 - - PF19 EF S0 PM IME - - - DAE PE CEIP CEAS CEMS
5
27 Voltage AS-i+ to AS-i- in mV
28 Voltage FE to AS-i- in mV
29 Symmetry in % (-100% ... +100%)
Legend:
Alarm Description
IME internal master error: Internal system error of an AS-i master
PM projection mode: AS-i master was set to the projection mode.
S0 slave 0 detected: New slave 0 was detected.
EF earth fault: Earth fault was detected
PF22.5 22.5V AS-i Power-Fail (classic AS-i Power) was detected.
PF19 19 AS-i Power-Fail (Power24) was detected.
CEMS Configuration Error – Missing Slave: AS-i configuration error, one or several slaves are projected, but not
available.
CEAS Configuration Error – Additional Slave: AS-i configuration error, one or several slaves are available, but
not projected.
CEIP Configuration Error – Invalid Profile: AS-i configuration error, the slave profiles of one or several slaves
differ from the projected slave profiles.
PE periphery error: One or several AS-i slaves have a periphery error.
DAE duplicate address error: One or several multiple-addressing faults occurred.
>
Diagnosis - AS-i master 2: list of missing slaves

12731
AS-i master 2: list of missing slaves:

bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
If at least 1 bit is set in this list, the bit for CEMS is also set.
205
>

12732
AS-i master 2: List of non-projected slaves:

bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
If at least 1 bit is set in this list, the bit for CEAS is also set.
>

12733
AS-i master 2: List of slaves with wrong slave profile:

bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
If at least 1 bit is set in this list, the bit for CEIP is also set.
>
Diagnosis - AS-i master 2: list of peripheral faults

12734
AS-i master 2: list of peripheral faults:

bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
If at least 1 bit is set in this list, the bit for PE is also set.
206
>

12736
AS-i master 2: list of multiple addressed slaves:

bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
If at least 1 bit is set in this list, the bit for DAE is also set
(→ Diagnosis - AS-i master 1: AS-i diagnosis (→ page 200)).
207
>
Module setting: AC13x7 AS-i 1

12626
The diagnostic data for the module setting AC13x7 AS-i 1 have 13 words.
Word Description
1 AS-i master 1: Master flags

2...5 AS-i master 1: list of detected slaves (LDS)
6...9 AS-i master 1: configuration error
10...13 AS-i master 1: peripheral fault (LPF)
208
>
Diagnosis - AS-i master 1: Master flags

12674

bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
CNO PNO
1 - - - - - - - - - - PF LDS0 CACT -
T T
Legend:
Alarm Description
CACT Configuration Active: AS-i master is in the projection mode.
LDS0 LDS.0: A single slave with the address 0 was detected
PF AS-i_Power_Fail: AS-i voltage too low
PNOT NOT Periphery_OK: periphery fault
CNOT NOT Configuartion_OK: configuration error
- reserved
>
Diagnosis - AS-i master 1: list of detected slaves (LDS)

12675
AS-i master 1: list of detected slaves (LDS):

bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Possible value of slave fields:
0 ... slave was not detected
1.... slave was detected
209
>
Diagnosis - AS-i master 1: configuration error

12677
AS-i master 1: Configuration errors:

bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 ... slave works correctly
1.... slave has caused configuration error
>
Diagnosis - AS-i master 1: peripheral fault (LPF)

12676
AS-i master 1: peripheral fault (LPF):

bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
10 15(A) 14(A) 13(A) 12(A) 11(A) 10(A) 9(A) 8(A) 7(A) 6(A) 5(A) 4(A) 3(A) 2(A) 1(A) n.a.
1.... slave has caused a periphery fault
210
>
Module setting: AC13x7 AS-i 1+2

12627
The diagnostic data for the module setting AC13x7 AS-i 1 have 25 words. Words 1 to 13 correspond
to those of the module setting AC13x7 AS-i 1 (→ Module setting: AC13x7 AS-i 1 (→ page 208)).
Word Description
211
>

12759
→ Diagnosis - AS-i master 1: Master flags (→ page 209)

>

12760
→ Diagnosis - AS-i master 1: list of detected slaves (LDS) (→ page 209)

>

12761
→ Diagnosis - AS-i master 1: configuration error (→ page 210)

>

12762
→ Diagnosis - AS-i master 1: peripheral fault (LPF) (→ page 210)
212
>

12763
AS-i master 2: Master flags:
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
LDS CAC
14 - - - - - - - - - CNOT - PNOT PF -
0 T
Legend:
Alarm Description
CACT Configuration Active: AS-i master is in the projection mode.
LDS0 LDS.0: A single slave with the address 0 was detected
PF AS-i_Power_Fail: AS-i voltage too low
PNOT NOT Periphery_OK: periphery fault
CNOT NOT Configuartion_OK: configuration error
- reserved
>

12764
AS-i master 2: list of detected slaves (LDS):

bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 ... slave was not detected
1.... slave was detected
213
>

12765
AS-i master 2: Configuration errors:

bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1.... slave has caused configuration error
>

12674
AS-i master 2: peripheral fault (LPF):

bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
23 15(A) 14(A) 13(A) 12(A) 11(A) 10(A) 9(A) 8(A) 7(A) 6(A) 5(A) 4(A) 3(A) 2(A) 1(A) n.a.
1.... slave has caused a periphery fault
214
>
Slot 14 – Inputs from PLC

17747
Slot Size
[words]
14 Data from the Empty module = module is deactivated 0

device-internal PLC to the
EtherNet/IP PLC 004 words = 4 words from AC14 PLC to fieldbus PLC 4
008 words = 8 words from AC14 PLC to fieldbus PLC 8
215
>
Slot 15 – Outputs to PLC

17746
Slot Size
[words]
15 Data from the EtherNet/IP Empty module = module is deactivated 0

PLC to the device-internal
PLC 004 words = 4 words from fieldbus PLC to AC14 PLC 4
008 words = 8 words from fieldbus PLC to AC14 PLC 8
216
>
8.7.5 Acyclic data
Overview: acyclic data ..........................................................................................................................218

Acyclic data records .............................................................................................................................220
Command channels ..............................................................................................................................247
Programmers' notes: call up acyclic services .......................................................................................334
12895
With the help of acyclic data, IO devices can be parameterised or configured, or status information can
be read. The acyclic data are not automatically updated in the host controller, but have to be explicitly
requested by means of special commands (→ Programmers' notes: call up acyclic services (→ page 334)).
Acyclic data belong to the category of explicit messages and are not real-time capable.
The following acyclic data are available:
 Acyclic data set
→ Overview: Acyclic data sets (→ page 221)
 Fieldbus command channel
→ Overview: System commands (→ page 250)
→ Overview: AS-i master commands (→ page 269)
217
>
Overview: acyclic data

12459
The attributes in object class 801, instance 1, are preset as follows:
Attribute from to Content DS Access Numbe

[dec] byte no. byte no. r = read r of
[dec] [dec] w = write words
1 0 51 Read system information DS1 r 26
30 0 239 System command request channel -- r/w 120
31 0 239 System command reply channel -- r 120
M1: digital slave inputs 1(A)…31(A) and 1B…31B

32 0 69 (1 byte per slave) + M1 master flags DS2 r 35
(status AS-i master and exec.-ctl. flags and host flags)
33 0 149 M1: analogue slave inputs 1(A)…15(B) DS3 r 75
M1: digital slave outputs 1(A)…31(A) and 1B…31B
35 0 63 DS5 r/w 32
(1 byte per slave)
36 0 119 M1: analogue slave outputs 1(A)…15(B) DS6 r/w 60
38 0 63 M1: status flags analogue outputs 1(A)…31(A) and 1B…31B DS8 r 32
39 0 31 M1: slave lists LAS, LDS, LPF, LCE DS9 r 16

40 0 7 M1: slave list LPS DS10 r 4
41 0 127 M1: current configuration data CDI DS11 r 64
42 0 127 M1: projected configuration data PCD DS12 r 64
43 0 63 M1: input parameter image DS13 r 32
44 0 63 M1: output parameter image DS14 r/w 32
M1: slave error counter, configuration error counter, AS-i cycle
46 0 143 DS15 r 72
counter
47 0 23 M1: LCEMS, LCEAS, LDAE DS17 r 12
62 0 239 M1: command request channel -- r/w 120
63 0 239 M1: command reply channel -- r 120
M2: digital slave inputs 1(A)…31(A) and 1B…31B

64 0 69 (1 byte per slave) + M2 master flags DS2 r 35

M2: digital slave outputs 1(A)…31(A) and 1B…31B
67 0 63 DS5 r/w 32
(1 byte per slave)
70 0 63 M2: status flags analogue outputs 1(A)…31(A) and 1B…31B DS8 r 32
71 0 31 M2: slave lists LAS, LDS, LPF, LCE DS9 r 16
72 0 7 M2: slave list LPS DS10 r 4
218
Attribute from to Content DS Access Numbe

[dec] byte no. byte no. r = read r of
[dec] [dec] w = write words
73 0 127 M2: current configuration data CDI DS11 r 64

74 0 127 M2: projected configuration data PCD DS12 r 64
75 0 63 M2: input parameter image DS13 r 32
76 0 63 M2: output parameter image DS14 r/w 32
M2: slave error counter, configuration error counter, AS-i cycle
78 0 143 DS15 r 72
counter
79 0 23 M2: LCEMS, LCEAS, LDAE DS17 r 12
94 0 239 M2: command request channel -- r/w 120
95 0 239 M2: command reply channel -- r 120
Legend:
DS = data set (→ Overview: acyclic data sets (→ page 221, → page 220))
M1 = AS-i master 1
M2 = AS-i master 2
219
>
Acyclic data records
Overview: Acyclic data sets ..................................................................................................................221

DS1 – System information ....................................................................................................................222
DS2 – Digital inputs of the slaves and master flags .............................................................................223
DS3 – Analogue inputs of slaves 1(A)...15(B) ......................................................................................224
DS4 – Analogue inputs of slaves 16(A)...31(B) ....................................................................................226
DS5 – Digital outputs of the slaves ......................................................................................................228
DS6 – Analogue outputs of slaves 1(A)...15(B)....................................................................................229
DS7 – Analogue outputs of slaves 16(A)...31(B)..................................................................................230
DS8 – Status of the analogue output data of the slaves 1...31 ............................................................231
DS9 – Slave lists LAS, LDS, LPF, LCE ................................................................................................233
DS10 – Slave list LPS ........................................................................................................................234
DS11 – Current configuration data CDI ................................................................................................235
DS12 – Projected configuration data PCD ...........................................................................................237
DS13 – Image of the input parameters of the slaves ...........................................................................239
DS14 – Image of the output parameters of the slaves .........................................................................240
DS15 – Slave error counter, configuration error counter, AS-i cycle counter ......................................241
DS17 – Error lists LCEMS, LCEAS, LDAE ...........................................................................................244
DS18 – Fieldbus information ................................................................................................................245
17036
The data records are transmitted acyclically upon request of the <fieldbus> master.
220
>
Overview: Acyclic data sets

17035
Data Content Access Words

set no. r = read
w = write
DS1 System information r 26
DS2 Digital slave inputs 1(A)…31(A) and 1B…31B + master flags r 36
DS3 Analogue slave inputs 1(A)…15(B) r 75
DS4 Analogue slave inputs 16(A)…31(B) r 80
DS5 Digital slave outputs 1(A)…31(A) and 1B…31B r/w 32
DS6 Analogue slave outputs 1(A)…15(B) r/w 60
DS7 Analogue slave outputs 16(A)…31(B) r/w 64
DS8 Status flags analogue outputs 1(A)…31(A) and 1B…31B r 32
DS9 Slave lists LAS, LDS, LPF, LCE r 16
DS10 Slave lists LPS r 4
DS11 Current configuration data CDI r 64
DS12 Projected configuration data PCD r 64
DS13 Input parameter image r 32
DS14 Input parameter image r/w 32
DS15 Slave error counter, configuration error counter, AS-i cycle counter r 72
DS16 n.a. – –
DS17 Error lists LCEMS, LCEAS, LDAE r 12
DS18 Read fieldbus info (only available via CODESYS) r 19
DS19 n.a. – –
DS20 n.a. – –
221
>
DS1 – System information

8753
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 Article number 1) (byte 0) = "A" Article number 1) (byte 1) = “C"
1 Article number 1) (byte 2) = A1 Article number 1) (byte 3) = A2

2 Article number 1) (byte 4) = A3 Article number 1) (byte 5) = A4
3 Device number 2) (byte 1) = G1 Device number 2) (byte 0) = G2
4 Serial number 3) (byte 0, MSB) Serial number 3) (byte 1)
5 Serial number 3) (byte 2) Serial number 3) (byte 3)
10 Software type Software Version (Major Version)
11 Software Version (Minor Version) Software Version (Build Version)
5
12 Operating hours ) Total (byte 3, high byte) Operating hours 5) Total (byte 2)
13 Operating hours 5) Total (byte 1) Operating hours 5) Total (byte 0, low byte)
14 Operating hours 5) Uptime (byte 3, high byte) Operating hours 5) Uptime (byte 2)
15 Operating hours 5) Uptime (byte 1) Operating hours 5) Uptime (byte 0, low byte)
16 Operating hours 5) PLC (byte 3, high byte) Operating hours 5) PLC (byte 2)
17 Operating hours 5) PLC (byte 1) Operating hours 5) PLC (byte 0, low byte)
18 Operating hours 5) display (byte 3, high byte) Operating hours 5) display (byte 2)
19 Operating hours 5) display (byte 1) Operating hours 5) display (byte 0, low byte)
20 Device temperature 6) (byte 0, high byte) Device temperature 6) (byte 1, low byte)
21 reserved Number of AS-i masters
7
22 Language ) (1st letter) Language 7) (2nd letter)
23 Return to start screen (on/off) Screen saver (on/off)
24 CODESYS PLC operating mode (activ/inactiv) Output access
25 Device cycle in µs (high byte) Device cycle in µs (low byte)
1
) Article number: "AC" + A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 as character string, e.g. "AC1401" or "AC402S"
2
) Device number: G1 + G2 as character string, e.g. "AB"
3
) Serial number: 12-digit character string
5
) Operating hours: in seconds, Unsigned Double word (32 bit)
6
) Device temperature: in 1/100 °C, signed Word (16 bit), e.g. 4232 = 42.32 °C
7)
Language: LANG_ID as ASCII code, e.g. "DE" = "D" + "E" = 0x44 + 0x45
222
>
DS2 – Digital inputs of the slaves and master flags

8754
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 reserved Slave 1(A): D3...D0 reserved reserved
1 reserved Slave 3(A): D3...D0 reserved Slave 2(A): D3...D0
16 reserved Slave 1B: D3...D0 reserved reserved
17 reserved Slave 3B: D3...D0 reserved Slave 2B: D3...D0
32 AS-i master status flags (→ AS-i master status flags (→ page 140))
33 Execution control flags (→ Execution control flags (→ page 141))
34 Host flags (→ Host flags (→ page 142))
35 DAE / EE-Flags (→ DAE/EE flags (→ page 143))
223
>
DS3 – Analogue inputs of slaves 1(A)...15(B)

8756
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0...4 Analogue input data of single slave 1 or of (slave 1A and slave 1B)
224
>
Details of the 5-word areas

8758
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
n Analogue value channel 0 of single slave x or channel 0 of slave xA
n+1 Analogue value channel 1 of single slave x or channel 1 of slave xA
n+2 Analogue value channel 2 of single slave x or channel 0 of slave xB
n+4 TIB -- TIA -- TOB -- TOA -- O3 V3 O2 V2 O1 V1 O0 V0
Legend:
On overflow bit 1 bit 0 = data is in the valid range
1 = data is in the invalid range (especially in case of input modules when
the measuring range is not reached or exceeded)
TIx transfer to the slave 1 bit from master profile M4 onwards:
(transfer Input) 0 = slave transmits input data as a value
(15 bits long, plus sign)
1 = slave transmits input data as a bit pattern
(16 bits long, no sign)
TOx transfer from the slave 1 bit from master profile M4 onwards:
(transfer output) 0 = slave receives output data as a value
1 = slave receives output data as a bit pattern
Vn valid bit 1 bit 0 = values in channel n are invalid
1 = values in channel n are valid
Output data must be valid (Vn = 1) to be enabled in the AS-i slave!
225
>
DS4 – Analogue inputs of slaves 16(A)...31(B)

8759
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
226
>
Details of the 5-word areas

8758
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
n Analogue value channel 0 of single slave x or channel 0 of slave xA
n+1 Analogue value channel 1 of single slave x or channel 1 of slave xA
n+4 TIB -- TIA -- TOB -- TOA -- O3 V3 O2 V2 O1 V1 O0 V0
Legend:
On overflow bit 1 bit 0 = data is in the valid range
1 = data is in the invalid range (especially in case of input modules when
the measuring range is not reached or exceeded)
TIx transfer to the slave 1 bit from master profile M4 onwards:
(transfer Input) 0 = slave transmits input data as a value
1 = slave transmits input data as a bit pattern
Vn valid bit 1 bit 0 = values in channel n are invalid
1 = values in channel n are valid
Output data must be valid (Vn = 1) to be enabled in the AS-i slave!
227
>
DS5 – Digital outputs of the slaves

8761
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 reserved slave 1(A): D3...D0 reserved reserved
16 reserved Slave 1B: D3...D0 reserved reserved
>
228
DS6 – Analogue outputs of slaves 1(A)...15(B)

8763
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0...3 analogue output data of single slave 1 or of (slave 1A and slave 1B)
4...7 Analogue output data of single slave 2 or of (slave 2A and slave 2B)
>
Details 4 channels per analogue slave

8765
The following table shows the structure of the data image to set the parameter:
 Analogue channels per input slave = 4
 Analogue channels per output slave = 4
Word Content of the transferred word for parameter setting = 4 channels

Offset-Nr.
n Mx / slave m(A) / channel
n+1 Mx / slave m(A) / channel
Legend:
n ... Number of 4 word blocks
1 = for setting 4 words
...
2 = AS-i master 2
m ... Numeric part of the selected AS-i slave address
>
229
DS7 – Analogue outputs of slaves 16(A)...31(B)

8766
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0...3 analogue output data of single slave 16 or of (slave 16A and slave 16B)
40...43 Analogue output data of single slave 26 or of (slave 26 and slave 26B)
60...63 Analogue output data of single slave 31 or of (slave 31and slave 31B)
>
Details 4 channels per analogue slave

8765
The following table shows the structure of the data image to set the parameter:
 Analogue channels per input slave = 4
 Analogue channels per output slave = 4
Word Content of the transferred word for parameter setting = 4 channels

Offset-Nr.
n Mx / slave m(A) / channel
n+1 Mx / slave m(A) / channel
Legend:
n ... Number of 4 word blocks
...
2 = AS-i master 2
m ... Numeric part of the selected AS-i slave address
230
>
DS8 – Status of the analogue output data of the slaves 1...31

8768
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 reserved
1 Status of the analogue output data of single slave 1 or of (slave 1A and slave 1B)
32 reserved
231
Details of the words shown above:

bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
n -- TOB -- TOA -- OVB -- OVA reserved
Legend:
OVx output valid 1 bit channel-independent bit "output data valid" from the slave:
CTT1:
0 = more than 3.5 s have elapsed since the last update of the output
values
1 = slave requests new output data within the next 3 s
CTT2…CTT5:
0 = slave receives no new output data
1 = slave receives new output data
Only valid for analogue output slaves.
For input slaves set OVx = "0"!
232
>
DS9 – Slave lists LAS, LDS, LPF, LCE

8770
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0...3 LAS / list of active slaves
4...7 LDS / list of detected slaves
8...11 LPF / list of slaves with periphery faults
12...15 LCE / list of slaves with configuration errors
>
Details of the slave lists

8772
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
n 15(A) 14(A) 13(A) 12(A) 11(A) 10(A) 9(A) 8(A) 7(A) 6(A) 5(A) 4(A) 3(A) 2(A) 1(A) 0 *)
n+1 31(A) 30(A) 29(A) 28(A) 27(A) 26(A) 25(A) 24(A) 23(A) 22(A) 21(A) 20(A) 19(A) 18(A) 17(A) 16(A)
n+2 15B 14B 13B 12B 11B 10B 9B 8B 7B 6B 5B 4B 3B 2B 1B res.
n+3 31B 30B 29B 28B 27B 26B 25B 24B 23B 22B 21B 20B 19B 18B 17B 16B
*) LAS and LPS have no slave 0, therefore this bit is set to 0!
233
>
DS10 – Slave list LPS

8773
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0...3 List of projected slaves LPS
>
Details of the slave lists

8772
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
n 15(A) 14(A) 13(A) 12(A) 11(A) 10(A) 9(A) 8(A) 7(A) 6(A) 5(A) 4(A) 3(A) 2(A) 1(A) 0 *)
n+2 15B 14B 13B 12B 11B 10B 9B 8B 7B 6B 5B 4B 3B 2B 1B res.
*) LAS and LPS have no slave 0, therefore this bit is set to 0!
234
>
DS11 – Current configuration data CDI

8775
bit
Offset
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Word no.
ID2 code ID1 code ID code IO code
0 Slave 0 *)
1 Slave 1(A)
2 Slave 2(A)
3 Slave 3(A)
4 Slave 4(A)
5 Slave 5(A)
6 Slave 6(A)
7 Slave 7(A)
8 Slave 8(A)
9 Slave 9(A)
10 Slave 10(A)
11 Slave 11(A)
12 Slave 12(A)
13 Slave 13(A)
14 Slave 14(A)
15 Slave 15(A)
16 Slave 16(A)
17 Slave 17(A)
18 Slave 18(A)
19 Slave 19(A)
20 Slave 20(A)
21 Slave 21(A)
22 Slave 22(A)
23 Slave 23(A)
24 Slave 24(A)
25 Slave 25(A)
26 Slave 26(A)
27 Slave 27(A)
28 Slave 28(A)
29 Slave 29(A)
20 Slave 30(A)
31 Slave 31(A)
32 reserved
33 Slave 1B
34 Slave 2B
235
bit
Offset
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Word no.
35 Slave 3B
36 Slave 4B
37 Slave 5B
38 Slave 6B
39 Slave 7B
40 Slave 8B
41 Slave 9B
42 Slave 10B
43 Slave 11B
44 Slave 12B
45 Slave 13B
46 Slave 14B
47 Slave 15B
48 Slave 16B
49 Slave 17B
50 Slave 18B
51 Slave 19B
52 Slave 20B
53 Slave 21B
54 Slave 22B
55 Slave 23B
56 Slave 24B
57 Slave 25B
58 Slave 26B
59 Slave 27B
60 Slave 28B
61 Slave 29B
62 Slave 30B
63 Slave 31B
*) contents for slave 0 only valid in CDI
236
>
DS12 – Projected configuration data PCD

8779
bit
Offset
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Word no.
0 reserved
1 Slave 1(A)
2 Slave 2(A)
3 Slave 3(A)
4 Slave 4(A)
5 Slave 5(A)
6 Slave 6(A)
7 Slave 7(A)
8 Slave 8(A)
9 Slave 9(A)
10 Slave 10(A)
11 Slave 11(A)
12 Slave 12(A)
13 Slave 13(A)
14 Slave 14(A)
15 Slave 15(A)
16 Slave 16(A)
17 Slave 17(A)
18 Slave 18(A)
19 Slave 19(A)
20 Slave 20(A)
21 Slave 21(A)
22 Slave 22(A)
23 Slave 23(A)
24 Slave 24(A)
25 Slave 25(A)
26 Slave 26(A)
27 Slave 27(A)
28 Slave 28(A)
29 Slave 29(A)
20 Slave 30(A)
31 Slave 31(A)
32 reserved
33 Slave 1B
34 Slave 2B
237
bit
Offset
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Word no.
35 Slave 3B
36 Slave 4B
37 Slave 5B
38 Slave 6B
39 Slave 7B
40 Slave 8B
41 Slave 9B
42 Slave 10B
43 Slave 11B
44 Slave 12B
45 Slave 13B
46 Slave 14B
47 Slave 15B
48 Slave 16B
49 Slave 17B
50 Slave 18B
51 Slave 19B
52 Slave 20B
53 Slave 21B
54 Slave 22B
55 Slave 23B
56 Slave 24B
57 Slave 25B
58 Slave 26B
59 Slave 27B
60 Slave 28B
61 Slave 29B
62 Slave 30B
63 Slave 31B
238
>
DS13 – Image of the input parameters of the slaves

8781
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 reserved Slave 1(A): P3...P0 reserved reserved
1 reserved Slave 3(A): P3...P0 reserved Slave 2(A): P3...P0
16 reserved Slave 1B: P3...P0 reserved reserved
17 reserved Slave 3B: P3...P0 reserved Slave 2B: P3...P0
239
>
DS14 – Image of the output parameters of the slaves

8783
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 reserved Slave 1(A): P3...P0 reserved reserved
16 reserved Slave 1B: P3...P0 reserved reserved

240
>
DS15 – Slave error counter, configuration error counter, AS-i cycle counter
8785
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 Error counter in slave 0
1 Error counter in slave 1(A)
32 reserved
33 Error counter in slave 1B
241
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

64 AS-i cycle counter
65 Configuration error counter
66 AS-i error status
67 Telegram error rate
68 Message error counter
69 Voltage error counter 22.5V
70 Voltage error counter 19V
71 Earth fault counter
242
Legend:
AS-i error status ... Bit 0: Configuration error type 1 (missing slave)
Bit 1: Configuration error type 2 (too many slaves)
Bit 2: Configuration error type 3 (slave with wrong profile)
Bit 3: Peripheral fault
Bit 4: Double address
Bit 8: internal AS-i master error
Bit 9: Projection mode
Bit 10: Slave address 0 detected
Bit 11: Earth fault
Bit 12: Voltage drop below 22.5 V
Bit 13: Voltage drop below 19.0 V
Bit 14: reserved
Bit 15: reserved
Telegram error rate ... Number of faulty telegrams during the past 2000 telegram cycles
Symmetry ... AS-i symmetry from -100% to +100%, 0% = symmetrical-to-ground
Bit15: bit with sign
243
>
DS17 – Error lists LCEMS, LCEAS, LDAE

15911
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0...3 LCEMS (list of configuration errors - missing slaves)
4...7 LCEAS (list of configuration errors - additional slaves)
8...11 LDAE (list of double address errors)
>
Details of the error lists

6658
The error lists (LCEMS, LCEAS, LDAE) have a size of 64 bits each. The respective bits each
represent a slave address:
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
n 15(A) 14(A) 13(A) 12(A) 11(A) 10(A) 9(A) 8(A) 7(A) 6(A) 5(A) 4(A) 3(A) 2(A) 1(A) 0
n+2 15B 14B 13B 12B 11B 10B 9B 8B 7B 6B 5B 4B 3B 2B 1B -
244
>
DS18 – Fieldbus information

17038
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 Fieldbus state Fieldbus type
1 Ethernet connection status Profibus slave address
2 Profinet/EtherNet/IP IP address (byte 2) Profinet/EtherNet/IP IP address (byte 1, MSB)
3 Profinet/EtherNet/IP IP address (byte 4, LSB) Profinet/EtherNet/IP IP address (byte 3)
4 Profinet/EtherNet/IP subnet mask (byte 2) Profinet/EtherNet/IP subnet mask (byte 1, MSB)
5 Profinet/EtherNet/IP subnet mask (byte 4, LSB) Profinet/EtherNet/IP subnet mask (byte 3)

6 Profinet/EtherNet/IP gateway address (byte 2) Profinet/EtherNet/IP gateway address (byte 1, MSB)
7 Profinet/EtherNet/IP gateway address (byte 4, LSB) Profinet/EtherNet/IP gateway address (byte 3)
8 MAC0 (byte 2) MAC0 (byte 1, LSB)
9 MAC0 (byte 4) MAC0 (byte 3)
10 MAC0 (byte 6, MSB) MAC0 (byte 5)
13 MAC1 (byte 6, MSB) MAC1 (byte 5)
16 MAC2 (byte 6, MSB) MAC2 (byte 1, LSB)
17 Profinet host address (byte 2) Profinet host address (byte 1, MSB)

18 Profinet host address (byte 4, LSB) Profinet host address (byte 3)
Legend:
Fieldbus Name of the fieldbus 1 byte 0x00 = no fieldbus present

type 0x01 = Profinet
0x02 = Profibus
0x03 = EtherNet/IP
Fieldbus Status of the fieldbus 1 byte 0x00 = initialisation
status connection 0x01 = waiting for connection
0x02 = connection is being established
0x03 = configuration of the connection in progress
0x04 = parameter setting in progress
0x05 = waiting for module configuration
0x06 = cyclic data exchange with the fieldbus controller/host
0x07 = connection establishment
Profibus Profibus address of the 1 byte 0x00 = no Profibus?
slave device 0x03 = address 3
address ...
0x7B = address 123
Ethernet Status and Ethernet 1 byte 0x00 = no connection
connection connections on ports X6 0x01 = connection on port X7 established, no connection on port X6
status and X7 0x02 = connection on port X6 established, no connection on port X7
0x03 = connection on ports X6 and X7 established
245
Profinet/ IP address of the device 4 bytes One address segment per byte.
EtherNet/IP e.g. 192.168.0.102
IP address Byte 1: 192 = 0xC0
Byte 2: 168 = 0xA8
Byte 3: 0 = 0x00
Byte 4: 102 = 0x66
Profinet/ Subnet mask of the 4 bytes see Profinet/EtherNet/IP IP address
EtherNet/IP- Ethernet network
Subnet
mask
Profinet/ IP address of the 4 bytes see Profinet/EtherNet/IP IP address
EtherNet/IP EtherNet gateway
gateway
address
MAC0 MAC0-ID of the device 6 bytes One MAC segment per byte:
e.g. 00:02:01:01:98:D2
Byte 1: D2
...
Byte 6: 00
For EtherNet/IP, MAC0 = 00:00:00:00:00:00.
MAC1 MAC1-ID of the device 6 bytes see MAC0
MAC2 MAC2-ID of the device 6 bytes see MAC0
MAC 1 equals MAC2
Profinet host IP address of the Profinet 4 bytes see Profinet/EtherNet/IP IP address
address host
No host address is displayed in EtherNet/IP
246
>
Command channels
Principle of the command channels .....................................................................................................248

System commands ...............................................................................................................................249
AS-i master commands ........................................................................................................................268
16573
247
>
Principle of the command channels

13543
A command channel consists of a request channel and a response channel.

Command request channel (fieldbus master >>> device)
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 user ID
2 command number
3...120 command parameters
Command response channel (device >>> fieldbus master)

bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 reflected user ID
2 reflected command number
3 reserved Command status (→ page 248)
4 command error code
reply data to the command
5...120
Unused bytes receive invalid values from old command replies. DO NOT evaluate!
>
Command status
8795
Status Status code Description

[hex]
OK 00 Command execution was successful. Response data is available and valid.
FAILED 01 Error when executing the command. The exact cause of the error occurred is stated in the
command-specific error code. The response data is invalid.
TO 02 Timeout error: The command was cancelled due to timeout.
UC 03 Unknown Command: The transmitted command number is not known in the system.
NOP 04 Not valid parameter: The transmitted command parameter is invalid.
248
>
System commands
Overview: System commands ..............................................................................................................250

Command 257 (0x0101) – Quick setup AS-i master 1 + 2...................................................................251
Command 259 (0x0103) – Select user language .................................................................................253
Command 260 (0x0104) – Change display settings ............................................................................255
Command 261 (0x0105) – Set output control ......................................................................................256
Command 262 (0x0106) – Set PLC operating mode ...........................................................................257
Command 265 (0x0109) – Set date/time .............................................................................................258
Command 266 (0x010A) – Set parameters of the NTP server ............................................................260
Command 267 (0x010B) – Read date / time / NTP settings ................................................................262
Command 268 (0x010C) – Reboot system ..........................................................................................264
Command 269 (0x010D) – Read fieldbus info .....................................................................................266
Command 272 (0x0110) – Display target visualisation ........................................................................267
11077
249
>
Overview: System commands

11078
Comm. no. Comm. no.

Description
[hex] [dec]
0101 257 Quick setup AS-i master 1 (and AS-i master 2, if available)
0103 259 Change the user language
0104 260 Change the display settings
0105 261 Configure the output access
0106 262 Set the PLC operating mode
0109 265 Set the date / time
010A 266 Set the NTP server parameters
010B 267 Read date / time / NTP settings
010C 268 Reboot the system
010D 269 Read fieldbus information (can only be executed in CODESYS!)
0110 272 Display target visualization
250
>
Command 257 (0x0101) – Quick setup AS-i master 1 + 2

11079
>

11080
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 UID
2 command number
3 reserved reserved M2 M1
The area is completely ignored.
4 ...120
It does not matter whether the data area exists or what data is contained.
Legend:
M1 AS-i master 1 1 bit 0 = "Quick set-up" command is NOT executed on the master
1 = "Quick set-up" command is executed on the master
M2 AS-i master 2 1 bit 0 = "Quick set-up" command is NOT executed on the master
1 = "Quick set-up" command is executed on the master
UID user ID 1 word 0x0000…0xFFFF = 0…65535
The user ID ensures clear identification of the commmand response data
of the command request data sent before. The user can assign any user
ID in the command request. The AS-i master reflects the user ID from the
command request into the corresponding command response.
The command "blocks" further processing as long as the quick set-up needs. That means that
the WRREC command signals "busy" until the function result is available. This may take a few
seconds.
251
>

11081
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 reflected user ID
command error code AS-i master 2 command error code AS-i master 1
4
Possible command error codes (→ page 252) Possible command error codes (→ page 252)
>
Possible command error codes

11087
Error Code Error Meaning

[hex]
0x00 no error
0x03 SD0 slave with address 0 connected
0x04 IM - no master M1 and/or M2 specified or:
- master M2 does not exist (for units with 1 AS-i master)
When the Quick Setup is not executed for an AS-i master, the return value is always 0x00 (=
OK).
The command status has the value Failed when one of the errors is present on AS-i master 1
or 2 after command execution.
252
>
Command 259 (0x0103) – Select user language

11089
Via the command the user lanaguage for the local HMI and the web interface can be set. The
language setting always refers to both user interfaces.
>

11090
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 UID
2 command number
3 LANG_ID
4 ... 120
Legende:
MSG_ID User language 1 word 0x0000 = no language selection, only return active language
0x4445 = DE, German
0x454E = EN, English (default)
0x4652 = FR, French
0x4954 = IT, Italian
0x4553 = ES, Spanish
0x5054 = PT, Portuguese
253
>

18011
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 reflected user ID
5 current LANG_ID
>

11095

[hex]
0x00 no error
0x01 IL Language is unknown or not available in this software version
Error code only appears if command status = FAILED.

The error code 0x01 appears when querying the currently set language (LANG_ID = 0x0000).
This is to be interpreted as correct processing of the command.
254
>
Command 260 (0x0104) – Change display settings

11099
>

11100
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 UID
2 command number
3 reserved reserved RS DS
4 ... 120
Legend:
DS Screen saver 1 bit 0 = no screen saver for local display
1 = screen saver for local display activated
RS return to splash screen 1 bit 0 = when the time has elapsed, device remains on current page
1 = when the time has elapsed, devices changes to the splash screen
>

11086
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 reflected user ID
>

11101
There are no error messages for this command.
255
>
Command 261 (0x0105) – Set output control

16673
Using this command, the controller instance for the outputs of the AS-i slaves can be set.
>

16683
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 UID
2 command number
3 reserved OC
4 ... 120
Legend:
OC Output Control 1 byte 0x01 = GW, gateway
0x02 = MAN, manual
0x03 = PLC, device-internal PLC
>

16685
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 reflected user ID
>

16687

[hex]
0x00 no error
0x01 IO Invalid parameter value transmitted for OC.
OR:
Control of the outputs could not be set.
256
>
Command 262 (0x0106) – Set PLC operating mode

16674
Using this command, the operating mode of the device-internal PLC can be set.
>

16689
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 UID
2 command number
3 reserved reserved PLC

4 ... 120
Legend:
PLC Operating mode of the 1 bit 0x00 = stop PLC application and switch off PLC
device-internal PLC 0x01 = switch on PLC and start PLC application (boot application)
>

16690
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 reflected user ID
>

16691

[hex]
0x00 no error
0x01 PF PLC operating mode could not be set.
257
>
Command 265 (0x0109) – Set date/time

16677
Using this command, the system time (date and time) of the device can be set.
>

16694
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 UID
2 command number
3 month day
4 year (byte 2, MSB) year (byte 1, LSB)
5 minutes hours
6 reserved seconds
7 ... 120
Legend:
day day 1 byte 0x01 = 1
0x02 = 2
...
0x1F = 31
month month 1 byte 0x01 = January
0x02 = February
...
0x0C = December
Year Year 1 word Possible values: 1971 ... 2037
0x07B3 = 1971
0x07B4 = 1972
...
0x07F5 = 2037
Example:
2014 = 0x07DE
year (MSB) = 0x07, year (LSB) = 0xDE
hours hours 1 byte 0x00 = 0
0x01 = 1
...
0x17 = 23
minutes minutes 1 byte 0x00 = 0
0x01 = 1
...
0x3B = 59
seconds seconds 1 byte 0x00 = 0
0x01 = 1
...
0x3B = 59
258
>

16695
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 reflected user ID
>

16696

[hex]
0x00 no error
0x01 IDT Transferred values for date/time are invalid and could not be set. Error
0x02 NAE NTP is active, transmitted value for time could not be set.
Deactivate NTP to be able to set the time.
Error code appears if command status = FAILED
259
>
Command 266 (0x010A) – Set parameters of the NTP server

16707
Using this command, the IP parameters of the NTP server can be set.
>

16705
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 UID
2 command number
3 NTP Offset reserved NTP
4 NTP server IP address (high byte, net address) NTP server IP address
5 NTP server IP address NTP server IP address (low byte, host address)
6 ... 120
Legend:
NTP Setting the NTP client 1 bit 0x0 = NTP client is inactive
0x1 = NTP client is active
NTP Offset NTP server provides the 1 byte 0x00 = system clock in local time
time in UTC. NTP Offset 0x01 = UTC -12:00
indicates the difference 0x02 = UTC -11:00
between UTC and local 0x03 = UTC -10:00
time. 0x04 = UTC -09:00
0x05 = UTC -08:00
0x06 = UTC -07:00
0x07 = UTC -06:00
0x08 =.UTC -05:00
0x09 = UTC -04:00
0x0A = UTC -03:30
0x0B = UTC -03:00
0x0C = UTC -02:00
0x0D = UTC -01:00
0x0E = UTC +00:00
0x0F = UTC +01:00
0x10 = UTC +02:00
0x11 = UTC +03:00
0x12 = UTC +03:30
0x13 = UTC +04:00
0x14 = UTC +04:30
0x15 = UTC +05:00
0x16 = UTC +05:30
0x17 = UTC +05:45
0x18 = UTC +06:00
0x19 = UTC +06:30
0x1A = UTC +07:00
0x1B = UTC +08:00
0x1C = UTC +09:00
0x1D = UTC +09:30
0x1E = UTC +10:00
0x1F = UTC +11:00
0x20 = UTC +12:00
260
NTP server IP address (IP-V4) of the 2 words Per segment of an IP address: 0 ....255
IP address NTP server 0x00 = 000
0x01 = 001
...
0x0FF = 255
Example:
IP address: 192.168.150.5
192 = 0xC0 (high byte)
168 = 0xA8
150 = 0x96
005 = 0x05 (low byte)
The duration of the synchronisation process depends on the settings of the NTP server. This
means that the synchronised system time is not immediately available after activation of the
NTP client.
► Do not query the synchronised system time immediately after activation of the NTP client.
>

16706
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 reflected user ID
>

16707

[hex]
0x00 no error
0x01 IS Wrong parameters transmitted. NTP server settings were not transmitted.
261
>
Command 267 (0x010B) – Read date / time / NTP settings

16679
Using this command, the current values for time, date and NTP settings can be read.
>

16712
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 UID
2 command number

3 ... 120
262
>

16713
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 reflected user ID
5 month day
6 year (byte 2, MSB) year (byte 1, LSB)
7 minutes hours
8 reserved seconds
9 NTP Offset reserved NTP
10 NTP server IP address (high byte, net address) NTP server IP address
11 NTP server IP address NTP server IP address (low byte, host address)
Legend:
- day → Command 266 (0x010A) – Set parameters of the NTP server (→ page 260)
- month
- year
- hours
- minutes
- seconds
- NTP → Command 266 (0x010A) – Set parameters of the NTP server (→ page 260)
- NTP Offset
- NTP server IP address
>

16714

[hex]
0x00 no error
263
>
Command 268 (0x010C) – Reboot system

16680
Using the command, the device can be restarted.

>

7032
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 UID
2 command number
3 0x4F (= O) 0x42 (= B)
4 0x54 (= T) 0x4F (= O)
5 ... 120
Legend:
To prevent an unintended or unauthorised restart of the system by calling the command

0x010C, a signature must be transmitted in addition. The command execution is stopped when
a wrong signature is transmitted.
The signature is: BOOT
264
>

7044
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 reflected user ID
>

7050

[hex]
0x01 Command error: Reboot could not be carried out.
265
>
Command 269 (0x010D) – Read fieldbus info

7052
The command reads information via the fieldbus.
The command can only be executed using the function block ACnnnn_SysCmd under
CODESYS! (→ programming manual, section ACnnnn_SysCmd)
>

7064
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 UID
2 command number

3 ... 120
>

8909
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 reflected user ID
5 ... 23 → DS18 – Fieldbus information (→ page 245)
>

7030

[hex]
0x00 no error
266
>
Command 272 (0x0110) – Display target visualisation

20593
This command enables switching between the menu page of the GUI and the target visualisation as
well as enables/disables the use of the key combination [] + [].
>

20594
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 UID
2 command number
3 TargetVisu
4 Hotkey
5...120 The area is completely ignored.
Legend:
TargetVisu Content of the device 1 Word 0x0000 = display GUI
display 0x0001 = display target visualisation
Hotkey Key combination for 1 Word 0x0000 = key combination enabled
switching from target 0x0001 = key combination disabled
visualisation to the menu
page of the GUI
>
Command reply channel (device >>> fieldbus master)

20595
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 reflected user ID
>

20596

[hex]
0x00 no error
0x01 Target visualisation cannot be displayed because CODESYS PLC is not active
267
>
AS-i master commands
Overview: AS-i master commands .......................................................................................................269

Error codes of the AS-i master commands ..........................................................................................271
Command 01 (0x0001) – Change parameters of an AS-i slave ..........................................................274
Command 03 (0x0003) – Project the currrent AS-i network ................................................................276
Command 04 (0x0004) – Change LPS ................................................................................................277
Command 05 (0x0005) – Change the operating mode of the AS-i master ..........................................278
Command 06 (0x0006) – Change AS-i slave address .........................................................................279
Command 07 (0x0007) - Set the auto address mode of the AS-i master ..........................................281
Command 09 (0x0009) – Change extended ID1 in the AS-i slave ......................................................282
Command 10 (0x000A) - Change PCD ................................................................................................284
Command 13 (0x000D) – AS-i master supply voltage, symmetry, earth fault .....................................287
Command 21 (0x0015) – Read ID string of an AS-i profile (S-7.4) ......................................................289
Command 26 (0x001A) – Read AS-i master info .................................................................................292
Command 28 (0x001C) – Deactivate slave reset when changing to the protected mode ...................293
Command 33 (0x0021) - Read diagnosis string of an AS-i slave (S-7.4) ............................................294
Command 34 (0x0022) - Read parameter string of an AS-i slave (S-7.4) ...........................................296
Command 35 (0x0022) - Write parameter string of an AS-i slave (S-7.4) ...........................................298
Command 36 (0x0024) – CTT2 Standard ............................................................................................300
Command 37 (0x0025) – CTT2 standard write ....................................................................................302
Command 38 (0x0026) – CTT2 Vendor Specific Read ........................................................................304
Command 39 (0x0027) – CTT2 Vendor Specific Write ........................................................................306
Command 64 (0x0040) – CTT2 device group read ..............................................................................308
Command 65 (0x0041) – CTT2 Device Group Write ...........................................................................310
Command 66 (0x0042) – CTT2 Vendor Specific Selective Read From Buffer ....................................312
Command 67 (0x0043) – CTT2 Vendor Specific Selective Write From Buffer ....................................314
Command 68 (0x0044) – CTT2 Vendor Specific Selective Read ........................................................316
Command 69 (0x0045) – CTT2 Vendor Specific Selective Write ........................................................318
Command 70 (0x0046) – CTT2 device group selective Rread ............................................................320
Command 71 (0x0047) – CTT2 Device Group Selective Write ...........................................................322
Command 73 (0x0049) – CTT2 Vendor Specific Exchange ................................................................324
Command 74 (0x004A) – CTT2 Device Group Exchange ...................................................................326
Command 75 (0x004B) – CTT2 Device Group Selective Read From Buffer .......................................328
Command 76 (0x004C) – CTT2 Device Group Selective Write From Buffer .......................................330
Command 80 (0x0050) – Adjust AS-i master settings .........................................................................332
Command 81 (0x0051) – Reset error counter......................................................................................333
8797
268
>
Overview: AS-i master commands

7250
Command Command
Description Note
[hex] [dec]
0001 1 write parameters to a connected AS-i slave
adopt and save currently connected AS-i slaves in the configuration ConfDataInput Slave
→ Projected
0003 3 This command causes a reset of the fieldbus connection. The Configuration Data
device must be rebooted! and LDS → LPS
0004 4 Change the list of the projected AS-i slaves (LPS)
0005 5 set the operating mode of the AS-i master
0006 6 readdress a connected AS-i slave
0007 7 set the auto addressing mode of the AS-i master
0009 9 change the extended ID code 1 in the connected AS-i slave
000A 10 change PCD
000D 13 AS-i master supply voltage, symmetry, earth fault
0015 21 read ID string of an AS-i slave with profile S-7.4 Slave profile S-7.4
0019 25 Set test mode
001A 26 read AS-i master info
Deactivation of the slave reset when changing to the protected
001C 28
mode
0021 33 read diagnosis string of an AS-i slave with profile S-7.4 Slave profile S-7.4
0022 34 read parameter string of an AS-i slave with profile S-7.4 Slave profile S-7.4
0023 35 write parameter string of an AS-i slave with profile S-7.4 Slave profile S-7.4
CTT2 standard read:
0024 36 CTT2 slave profile *)
Acyclic standard read call of an AS-i slave with CTT2 profile
CTT2 standard write:
Acyclic standard write call of an AS-i slave with CTT2 profile
CTT2 vendor specific read:
0026 38 acyclic manufacturer-specific read call of an AS-i slave with CTT2 CTT2 slave profile *)
profile
CTT2 vendor specific write:
0027 39 acyclic manufacturer-specific write call of an AS-i slave with CTT2 CTT2 slave profile *)
profile
CTT2 device group read:
Acyclic devicegroup read call of an AS-i slave with CTT2 profile
CTT2 device group write:
Acyclic devicegroup write call of an AS-i slave with CTT2 profile
CTT2 vendor specific selective read from buffer:
Selective standard read call of an AS-i slave with CTT2 profile
CTT2 vendor specific selective write from buffer:
Selective standard write call of an AS-i slave with CTT2 profile
CTT2 vendor specific selective read:
0044 68 Selective manufacturer-specific read call of an AS-i slave with CTT2 CTT2 slave profile *)
profile
CTT2 vendor specific selective write:
0045 69 Selective manufacturer-specific write call of an AS-i slave with CTT2 slave profile *)
CTT2 profile
269
Command Command
Description Note
[hex] [dec]
CTT2 device group selective read:
Selective devicegroup read call of an AS-i slave with CTT2 profile
CTT2 device group selective write:
Selective devicegroup write call of an AS-i slave with CTT2 profile
CTT2 vendor specific exchange:
0049 73 Manufacturer-specific data exchange with an AS-i slave with CTTS CTT2 slave profile *)
profile
CTT2 device group exchange:
004A 74 CTT2 slave profile *)
Devicegroup data exchange with an AS-i slave with CTTS profile
CTT2 device group selective read from buffer:
004B 75 Manufacturer-specific write/read call of an AS-i slave with CTTS CTT2 slave profile *)
profile
CTT2 device group selective write from buffer:
004C 76 CTT2 slave profile *)
Devicegroup write/read call of an AS-i slave with CTTS profile
0050 80 Set AS-i master parameters
0051 81 Reset error counter

Legend:
CTT → chapter Combined transaction – Use of analogue channels in the gateway depending on the slave profile (→ page 153)
*) CTT2 profiles = S-7.5.5, S-7.A.5 or S-B.A.5
270
>
Error codes of the AS-i master commands
General error codes ..............................................................................................................................272

Standard CTT2 error codes ..................................................................................................................273
CTT2 error object .................................................................................................................................273
8836
271
>
General error codes

5682
Revision: 2014-03-05

[hex]
0x01 NOK no slave response OR:
master is in the offline mode when requesting the command
0x02 SND no slave with the old address found
0x04 SD2 slave with the new address already exists
0x05 DE error when deleting the old address
0x06 error when reading the IO configuration
0x07 SE error when writing the new address or extended ID code 1
0x08 AT new address could only be saved temporarily
0x09 ET extended ID code 1 could only be saved temporarily
0x0A NA the slave is not in the LAS
0x0B ID parameter or address invalid

0x0C faulty S-7.4 protocol sequence
0x0D ST S-7.4 protocol aborted (timeout)

0x0E IA invalid AS-i slave address for the S-7.4 protocol (e.g. B slaves)
0x0F SSA AS-i slave has aborted the S-7.4 string
0x10 AS-i S-7.4 no longer connected (no longer in LAS)
0x11 STA another S-7.4 transfer to the addressed AS-i slave is already active
0x12 HSE the previous segmented S-7.4 transfer was not yet completed
0x13 IDL invalid S-7.4 data length
0x14 master is in the wrong operating mode *)
0x16 timeout during command processing
0x17 CMD_PRE start requirements for S-7.4 command not met:
- wrong slave profile (is not S-7.4) or:
- slave is not in LAS or:
- master is not in the Protected mode
0x18 NM master is not in the protected mode
0x19 master is not in projection mode
0x20 command could not be processed within the specified time
0xE0...0xEF CTT2 error detected by AS-i slave;  CTT2 error codes (→ page 273)
0xF0 invalid CTT2 command
0xF1 invalid CTT2 response
0xF2 S-7.5 data length longer than 30 bytes
272
>
Standard CTT2 error codes

8931
The "standard CTT2 error code" provides information about errors occurred during processing of a
CTT2 command. It is transmitted in data byte 0 of the response channel of a CTT2 command. The
following table shows the possible values:
Error code Description
0x00 No fault
0x01 Invalid index
0x02 Invalid length
0x03 Command not implemented
0x04 Used, the command could not be completed in the specified time
0x05 Command was not acknowledged
0x06 Invalid sub-index
0x07 Command 'Selective Read Request' is missing
>
CTT2 error object

18393
In addition to the standard CTT2 error code, the "CTT2 error object" provides further
manufacturer-specific information about errors which occurred during processing of a CTT2 command.
It is transmitted in the response channel of a CTT2 command in the data bytes 0...5. The CTT2 error
object has the following structure:
Data byte Content

0 standard CTT2 error code (→ standard CTT2 error codes (→ page 273))
1...4 manufacturer-specific error information (→ data sheet of the AS-i slave)
273
>
Command 01 (0x0001) – Change parameters of an AS-i slave

8799
Requirement: The addressed AS-i master must be in the protected mode.

 Command 05 (0x0005) – Change the operating mode of the AS-i master (→ page 278)
>

11103
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 UID
2 command number
3 reserved reserved ST SLA

4 reserved reserved New output parameter
5...120
Legend:
SLA slave address 5 bits 0x00…0x1F = 0…31
ST slave type 1 bit 0 = single slave or A slave
1 = B slave (= addition of 0x20 or 32 to the slave address)
If the requested slave address (SLA) is not in the list of activated slaves (LAS), the new
parameters are stored in the AS-i master despite error message (error code 0x0A). If an AS-i
slave with this address is added to the AS-i network at a later point, the slave automatically
adopts the saved parameters.
274
>

11104
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 reflected user ID
5 reserved reserved Input parameters
6 ... 120
>

11105

[hex]
0x00 no error
0x0A NA the slave is not in the LAS
0x0B ID parameter or address invalid

275
>
Command 03 (0x0003) – Project the currrent AS-i network

8805
(= project all)
Requirement: The addressed AS-i master must be in the projection mode.
This command causes a reset of the fieldbus connection. The device must be rebooted!
>

11107
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 UID
2 command number

3 ... 120
Legende:
>

11086
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 reflected user ID
>

11109

[hex]
0x00 no error
276
>
Command 04 (0x0004) – Change LPS

8806

>

11111
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 UID
2 command number
3 15(A) 14(A) 13(A) 12(A) 11(A) 10(A) 9(A) 8(A) 7(A) 6(A) 5(A) 4(A) 3(A) 2(A) 1(A) --
5 15B 14B 13B 12B 11B 10B 9B 8B 7B 6B 5B 4B 3B 2B 1B --
7...120
Legend:
>

11086
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 reflected user ID
>

11112

[hex]
0x00 no error
277
>
Command 05 (0x0005) – Change the operating mode of the AS-i master

8807
>

11114
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 UID
2 command number
3 reserved MOD

4 ... 120
Legend:
MOD operating mode 1 byte 0x00 = set master to the normal mode (protected mode)
0x01 = set master to the projection mode
>

11086
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 reflected user ID
>

11115

[hex]
0x00 no error
278
>
Command 06 (0x0006) – Change AS-i slave address

8808

>

11117
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 UID
2 command number
3 reserved reserved ST old SLA
4 reserved reserved ST new SLA
5...120
Legend:
279
>

11086
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 reflected user ID
>

11118

[hex]
0x00 no error
0x04 SD2 slave with the new address already exists
0x06 error when reading the extended ID code 1
0x08 AT new address could only be saved temporarily
280
>
Command 07 (0x0007) - Set the auto address mode of the AS-i master
8811
>

11120
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 UID
2 command number
3 reserved AutoAd
4 ... 120
Legend:
AutoAd automatic addressing 1 byte 00 = deactivate automatic addressing
01 = activate automatic addressing
>

11086
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 reflected user ID
>

11101
281
>
Command 09 (0x0009) – Change extended ID1 in the AS-i slave

8812
>

11121
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 UID
2 command number
4 reserved new Extended ID-Code 1
5 ... 120
Legend:
282
>

11086
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 reflected user ID
>

11121

[hex]
0x00 no error
0x06 error when reading the extended ID code 1
0x0E IA invalid AS-i slave address 0 or 0B, or address 0 indicated twice
0x21 invalid ID code 1 (if bit 3 is set for A/B slave)
283
>
Command 10 (0x000A) - Change PCD

8814
>

11125
Bit
Offset
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Word no.
ID2-Code ID1-Code ID-Code IO-Code
1 UID
2 command number
3 reserved
4 Slave 1(A)
5 Slave 2(A)
6 Slave 3(A)
7 Slave 4(A)
8 Slave 5(A)
9 Slave 6(A)
10 Slave 7(A)
11 Slave 8(A)
12 Slave 9(A)
13 Slave 10(A)
14 Slave 11(A)
15 Slave 12(A)
16 Slave 13(A)
17 Slave 14(A)
18 Slave 15(A)
19 Slave 16(A)
20 Slave 17(A)
21 Slave 18(A)
22 Slave 19(A)
23 Slave 20(A)
24 Slave 21(A)
25 Slave 22(A)
26 Slave 23(A)
27 Slave 24(A)
28 Slave 25(A)
29 Slave 26(A)
30 Slave 27(A)
31 Slave 28(A)
32 Slave 29(A)
33 Slave 30(A)
284
Bit
Offset
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Word no.
ID2-Code ID1-Code ID-Code IO-Code
34 Slave 31(A)
35 reserved
36 Slave 1B
37 Slave 2B
38 Slave 3B
39 Slave 4B
40 Slave 5B
41 Slave 6B
42 Slave 7B
43 Slave 8B
44 Slave 9B
45 Slave 10B
46 Slave 11B
47 Slave 12B
48 Slave 13B
49 Slave 14B
50 Slave 15B
51 Slave 16B
52 Slave 17B
53 Slave 18B
54 Slave 19B
55 Slave 20B
56 Slave 21B
57 Slave 22B
58 Slave 23B
59 Slave 24B
60 Slave 25B
61 Slave 26B
62 Slave 27B
63 Slave 28B
64 Slave 29B
65 Slave 30B
66 Slave 31B
67...120
285
Legend:
>

11086
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 reflected user ID
>

11112

[hex]
0x00 no error
286
>
Command 13 (0x000D) – AS-i master supply voltage, symmetry, earth fault

8815
>

11107
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 UID
2 command number
3 ... 120
Legende:
287
>

11128
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 reflected user ID
5 reserved reserved PF1 PF2 SE EF PM PS
6 Voltage ASi+ to ASi- in [mV]
7 Voltage FE to ASi- in [mV]
8 Symmetry (-100...100) in [%]
9 ... 120
Legend:
EF earth fault 1 bit 0 = no earth fault is detected
1 = asymmetric supply voltage; classified as earth fault
PF1 powerfail 22.5 V 1 bit 0 = no AS-i Power Fail (classic APF)
1 = AS-i voltage < 22.5 V
There is an AS-i power fail (classic APF)
PF2 powerfail 19 V 1 bit 0 = no AS-i Power Fail (24V APF)
1 = AS-i voltage < 19 V
There is an AS-i power fail (24V APF)
PM powermodule 1 bit 0 = no data decoupling module is connected
1 = a data decoupling module is connected
PS powersource 1 bit 0 = the device is supplied from AUX
1 = the device is supplied from AS-i
SE status earth fault 1 bit 0 = no earth fault detection possible (e.g. no AS-i voltage)
detection 1 = earth fault detection provides valid data
>

11101
288
>
Command 21 (0x0015) – Read ID string of an AS-i profile (S-7.4)

8822
>

11130
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 UID
2 command number
4 ... 120
Legende:
289
>

11131
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 reflected user ID
5 Number of bytes received as from word no. 4 reserved ST reflected slave address
6 I/O 2D DT Start DT Count Mux field E type

7 number of parameter bytes to be read EDT Read reserved Diag reserved
8 EDT Write reserved Number of parameter bytes to be written
9 Device-specific information Manufacturer identification
10...m Device-specific information Device-specific information
(m+1)...120
Legend:
2D double data transfer 1 bit double data transfer (redundancy) possible
0 = simple data transfer
1 = double data transfer
number of parameter 1 byte number of bytes which can be read as parameter string
bytes to be read 00 = no parameter string readable
01...DBhex = 01...219dec = number of bytes
number of parameter 1 byte number of bytes which can be written as parameter string
bytes to be written 00 = no parameter string readable
01...DBhex = 01...219dec = number of bytes
Diag slave supports the 7.4 1 bit 0 = diagnosis string is not supported
diagnosis string 1 = diagnosis string is supported
DT-Count number of data triples 3 bits (information for the driver in the master)
DT-Start start triple 3 bits (information for the driver in the master)
E type slave function + 5 bits characterises the slave as regards functionality and data structure
data structure 00 = reserved
01 = transmitted values are measured values
02 = transmitted values are 16 digital bit values
03 = normal operation in 4-bit mode (4I/4O)
04...1Fhex = 04...31dec = reserved
EDT read reserved 3 bits reserved for later profiles
EDT write reserved 3 bits reserved for later profiles
device-specific 1 byte as an option more bytes for the manufacturer-specific device description
information
manufacturer 1 byte defined manufacturer number assigned by AS-International
identification
I/O direction of data 1 bit direction of data for the devices with E type  3
0 = input
1 = output
Mux field number of multiplexed 3 bits 0…3
data words number = value in "Mux field" +1
290

>

11132

[hex]
0x00 no error
0x10 AS-i S-7.4 slave deleted from LAS during current transmission
291
>
Command 26 (0x001A) – Read AS-i master info

8827
>

11107
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 UID
2 command number

3 ... 120
Legende:
>

11137
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 reflected user ID
5 M12 reserved
6 Master firmware version, places before the decimal point
7 Master firmware version, decimal places
8 ... 120
Legend:
M12 number of AS-i masters 1 byte 0x00 = device has 1 AS-i master
0x01 = device has 2 AS-i masters
>

11101
292
>
Command 28 (0x001C) – Deactivate slave reset when changing to the protected mode
8828
When changing from the projection mode to the protected mode, all slaves are normally briefly reset
(reset or offline phase). This may lead to problems when the system is running. In such cases the
"deactivation of the slave reset" prevents the short deactivation of the slave outputs during changing of
the operating mode.
>

11139
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 UID
2 command number
3 reserved OLP
4 ... 120
Legend:
OLP offline phase 1 byte 0x00 = offline phase when changing over to the protected mode
= slave reset 0x01 = no offline phase when changing over to the protected mode
>

11086
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 reflected user ID
>

11101
293
>
Command 33 (0x0021) - Read diagnosis string of an AS-i slave (S-7.4)

8829
>

11130
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 UID
2 command number

4 ... 120
Legende:
294
>

11141
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 reflected user ID
5 Number of bytes received reserved ST reflected slave address
6...m Diagnosis byte n+1 Diagnosis byte n

(m+1)...120
Legend:
>

11132

[hex]
0x00 no error
295
>
Command 34 (0x0022) - Read parameter string of an AS-i slave (S-7.4)

8830
>

11130
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 UID
2 command number
4 ... 120
Legende:
296
>

11143
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 reflected user ID
6 ... m Parameter byte n+1 Parameter byte n

(m+1) ... 120
Legend:
>

11132

[hex]
0x00 no error
297
>
Command 35 (0x0022) - Write parameter string of an AS-i slave (S-7.4)

8831
>

11145
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 UID
2 command number
3 Number of bytes to be transmitted reserved ST SLA
4...m parameter byte n+1 parameter byte n

(m+1)...120
Legend:
The number of the bytes to be sent must be divisible by 2 since the system always transmits
only multiples of 2 bytes in the S7.4 protocol.
298
>

11143
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 reflected user ID
6 ... m Parameter byte n+1 Parameter byte n

(m+1) ... 120
Legend:
>

11146

[hex]
0x00 no error
0x01 NOK Slave does not answer or AS-i master switches to offline mode during command execution
OR:
Timeout of slaves, switching of operating states with As-i parameters was not processed by
the slave. Calling a not supported operating state can also cause this error message.
0x0C 7.4 sequence failed. AS-i slave generated wrong 7.4 sequence

0x0F SSA AS-i slave has aborted the S-7.4 string
0x12 HSE the previous segmented S-7.4 transfer was not yet completed
0x13 IDL invalid S-7.4 data length
0x14 invalid S-7.4 command
299
>
Command 36 (0x0024) – CTT2 Standard

8832
CTT2 profiles = S-7.5.5, S-7.A.5 or S-B.A.5

>

11148
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 UID
2 command number
4 DL IX
5 ... 120
Legend:
DL data length 1 byte number of bytes to be transferred
permitted values: 0x00…0xFF = 0…255 ( data sheet of the slave)
IX index 1 byte pointer to the page to be read
300
>

18370
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 reflected user ID
5 number of bytes received reserved ST reflected slave address
6 data byte 0 RC
7 ... m data byte n+1* data byte n
* ... If the number of bytes to be transmitted is odd, a zero byte (= 0x00) is transmitted in the data byte n+1.
Legend:
RC CTT2 Response Code 1 byte 0x50 = No CTT2 error on command execution :
The following data bytes contain the requested data.
0x90 = CTT2 error on command execution:
- Data byte 0 contains → Standard CTT2 error codes (→ page 273).
- The data in the following data bytes is irrelevant.
>

11150
Error code Error Description

0x00 No fault
0x0A NA Slave is not in the LAS
0x14 IC Invalid S-7.4 command
0x17 CMD_PRE Start requirements for S-7.4 command not met:
- Wrong slave profile (is not S-7.4) or:
- Slave is not in LAS or:
- Master is not in the protected mode
0xE1 CTT2_ACYCL_RD_NOK Command execution error

0xE2 CTT2_ACYCL_CMD_NOK Invalid command
0xE3 CTT2_ACYCL_RESP_NOK Wrong response data or internal error
0xE4 CTT2_ACYCL_WR_LEN_NOK Wrong data length when writing
0xE5 CTT2_ACYCL_STATE_NOK Invalid state of the CTT2 state machine when executing the command
0xE6 CTT2_ACYCL_STATE_RESET Reset when executing the command
0xE7 CTT2_ACYCL_RD_LEN_NOK Wrong data length when reading
0xE8 CTT2_ACYCL_RD_WR_LEN_NOK Wrong data length when reading / writing
0xEF CTT2_ACYCL_CMD_TIMEOUT Timeout
301
>
Command 37 (0x0025) – CTT2 standard write

8848
>

11152
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 UID
2 command number
4 DL IX
5 ... m Data byte (n+1) Data byte n
(m+1) ... 120
Legend:
302
>

18375
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 reflected user ID
4 Command error code
5 reserved reserved ST Reflected slave address
6 data byte 0 RC
Legend:
The data in the following data bytes is irrelevant.
Data byte 0 contains → Standard CTT2 error codes (→ page 273).
>

11150

0x00 No fault

303
>
Command 38 (0x0026) – CTT2 Vendor Specific Read

8849

>

11148
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 UID
2 command number
4 DL IX
5 ... 120
Legend:
304
>

18371
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 reflected user ID
6 data byte 0 RC
Legend:
The following data bytes 0...5 contain → CTT2 error object (→ page 273).
>

11150

0x00 No fault

305
>
Command 39 (0x0027) – CTT2 Vendor Specific Write

8850

>

11152
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 UID
2 command number
4 DL IX
(m+1) ... 120
Legend:
306

11153
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 reflected user ID
5 reserved reserved ST reflected slave address
6 Data byte 0 RC
7 ... m Data byte n+1 Data byte n

Legend:
>

11150

0x00 No fault

307
>
Command 64 (0x0040) – CTT2 device group read

8851

>

11148
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 UID
2 command number

4 DL IX
5 ... 120
Legend:
308
>

18372
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 reflected user ID
6 data byte 0 RC
Legend:
>

11150

0x00 No fault

309
>
Command 65 (0x0041) – CTT2 Device Group Write

8852

>

11152
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 UID
2 command number

4 DL IX
(m+1) ... 120
Legend:
310
>

18386
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 reflected user ID
5 reserved reserved ST reflected slave address
6 data byte 0 RC
7 ... m data byte n+1 data byte n
Legend:
>

11150
0x00 No fault

311
>
Command 66 (0x0042) – CTT2 Vendor Specific Selective Read From Buffer

8853

>

11159
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 UID
2 command number
4 SIX IX
5 ... m reserved DL
(m+1) ... 120
Legend:
SIX sub-index 1 byte pointer on element on this page ( data sheet of the slave)
312
>

18387
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 reflected user ID
6 data byte 0 RC
Legend:
>

11150

0x00 No fault

313
>
Command 67 (0x0043) – CTT2 Vendor Specific Selective Write From Buffer

8855

>

11162
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 UID
2 command number
4 SIX IX
5 Data byte 0 DL
(m+1) ... 120
Legende:
314
>

18388
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 reflected user ID
6 data byte 0 RC
Legend:
Data byte 0 contains the number of bytes to be read (block length); Valid
values: 0x00 ... 0xFF (→ data sheet of the AS-i slave)
>

11150

0x00 No fault

315
>
Command 68 (0x0044) – CTT2 Vendor Specific Selective Read

8857

>

11159
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 UID
2 command number
4 SIX IX
5 ... m reserved DL
(m+1) ... 120
Legend:
316
>

18387
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 reflected user ID
6 data byte 0 RC
Legend:
>

11150

0x00 No fault

317
>
Command 69 (0x0045) – CTT2 Vendor Specific Selective Write

8858

>

11162
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 UID
2 command number
4 SIX IX
5 Data byte 0 DL
(m+1) ... 120
Legende:
318
>

18388
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 reflected user ID
6 data byte 0 RC
Legend:
Data byte 0 contains the number of bytes to be read (block length); Valid
>

11150

0x00 No fault

319
>
Command 70 (0x0046) – CTT2 device group selective Rread

8857

>

11159
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 UID
2 command number

4 SIX IX
5 ... m reserved DL
(m+1) ... 120
Legend:
320
>

18392
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 reflected user ID
6 data byte 0 RC
Legend:
RC CTT2 Response Code 1 byte 0x5A = No CTT2 error on command execution :
0x9A = CTT2 error on command execution:
>

11150

0x00 No fault

321
>
Command 71 (0x0047) – CTT2 Device Group Selective Write

8860

>

11162
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 UID
2 command number
4 SIX IX
5 Data byte 0 DL
(m+1) ... 120
Legende:
322
>

18391
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 reflected user ID
6 data byte 0 RC
Legend:
RC CTT2 Response Code 1 byte 0x5B = No CTT2 error on command execution :
Data byte 0 contains the block length (= number of bytes to be read); Valid
0x9B = CTT2 error on command execution:
>

11150

0x00 No fault

323
>
Command 73 (0x0049) – CTT2 Vendor Specific Exchange

8863

>

11168
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 UID
2 command number

4 RL IX
5 Data byte 0 WL
(m+1) ... 120
Legende:
RL read length 1 byte number of bytes to be read
WL write length 1 byte number of bytes to be written
324
>

18389
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 reflected user ID
6 data byte 0 RC
Legend:
RC CTT2 Response Code 1 byte 0x5D = No CTT2 error on command execution
0x9D = CTT2 error on command execution
>

11150

0x00 No fault

325
>
Command 74 (0x004A) – CTT2 Device Group Exchange

8866

>

11168
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 UID
2 command number

4 RL IX
5 Data byte 0 WL
(m+1) ... 120
Legende:
RL read length 1 byte number of bytes to be read
WL write length 1 byte number of bytes to be written
326
>

18390
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 reflected user ID
6 data byte 0 RC
Legend:
RC CTT2 Response Code 1 byte 0x5E = No CTT2 error on command execution :
0x9E = CTT2 error on command execution:
>

11150

0x00 No fault

327
>
Command 75 (0x004B) – CTT2 Device Group Selective Read From Buffer

8861

>

11159
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 UID
2 command number

4 SIX IX
5 ... m reserved DL
(m+1) ... 120
Legend:
328
>

18392
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 reflected user ID
6 data byte 0 RC
Legend:
RC CTT2 Response Code 1 byte 0x5A = No CTT2 error on command execution :
0x9A = CTT2 error on command execution:
>

11150

0x00 No fault

329
>
Command 76 (0x004C) – CTT2 Device Group Selective Write From Buffer

8862

>

11162
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 UID
2 command number
4 SIX IX
5 Data byte 0 DL
(m+1) ... 120
Legende:
330
>

18391
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 reflected user ID
6 data byte 0 RC
Legend:
RC CTT2 Response Code 1 byte 0x5B = No CTT2 error on command execution :
Data byte 0 contains the block length (= number of bytes to be read); Valid
0x9B = CTT2 error on command execution:
>

11150

0x00 No fault

331
>
Command 80 (0x0050) – Adjust AS-i master settings

16772
>

16774
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 UID
2 command number
3 Setting reserved MOD

4 ... 120
Legend:
Setting Selection of the 0x01 = ground-fault detection (EE)
diagnostic function 0x02 = double address recognition (DAE)
MOD Activate/deactivate the 0 = deactivate function
selected diagnostic 1 = activate function
function in the settings
>

16775
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 reflected user ID
>

16776

[hex]
0x00 no error
0x01 IP Wrong parameter assigned. Setting was not adopted.
332
>
Command 81 (0x0051) – Reset error counter

16773
Command sets the following counters to 0:

 Telegram errors
 All slave telegram errors
 Configuration errors
 Voltage drops < 22.5 V
 Voltage drops < 19.0 V
 Earth faults
 Error distribution telegram errors
>

16778
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 UID
2 command number
3 ... 120
>

16779
bit
Offset
Word no.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 reflected user ID
>

11101
333
>
Programmers' notes: call up acyclic services

11208
EtherNet/IP controllers use the Message (MSG) command to send data/commands asynchronously to
another network participant and receive its response.
For detailed information about the Message (MSG) command: → operating instructions of
the EtherNet/IP controller used!
334
>
8.7.6 Configuration mode

12945
To properly set the AC142n for permanent operation in the EtherNet/IP network, type and scope of the
data to be transmitted as well as the parameters of the EtherNet/IP interface need to be defined. The
following configuration modes are available:
 Configuration mode: Top-down (→ page 336)
 Configuration mode: Independent (→ page 341)
335
>
Configuration mode: Top-down

12948
In configuration mode 'Top-down', the device-specific parameters and the paramaters of the fieldbus
slots are set in the projecting software of the EtherNet/IP controller. The created configuration is then
transferred to AC142n (download).
Example: Configure AC142n in top-down mode and integrate in a RSLogix-5000 project
>
1 Preparations
► Connect AC142n to the → I/O scanner
► Configure the IP settings of the configuration interface (X3) in line with the network requirements (→ Notes on IP
settings (→ page 89)).
► Enabled the top-down configuration mode (→ Set the configuration mode (→ page 98)).
► Download and unpack the ESD file (→ Download the device and I/O description (→ page 95)).
► Import the downloaded EDS file in RSLogix 5000 (→ operating instructions RSLogix 5000).
>
2 Open/Create a EtherNet/IP project

► Start RSLogix 5000.
► Open an existing EtherNet/IP project.
OR
Create a new EtherNet/IP project with the EtherNet/IP controller and I/O scanner.
>
3 Add AC142n to the project

► In the project structure: Right-click on [I/O Configuration] > [Name_des_I/O-Scanners] > [Ethernet]
> The context menu appears.
► Create a new device with [New Module].
> The dialogue box [Select Module Type] appears.
Option 1: configure the device using the EDS file
► In the [Catalog] tab, select AC1421 or AC1422 and confirm with [Create].
> The [New Module] window appears.
► Set the following parameters:
Name  short description of device e.g. _AC1421
 name appears in the tree structure of the RSLogix-5000
project
Description  detailed description of device (optional) e.g. I/O adapter
 max. 128 characters
IP address IP address of the device's EtherNet/IP interface e.g. 192.168.10.10
► In the group [Module Definition], press [Change ...].
336
> The [Module Definition] window appears.

► Set the parameters as shown:
► Press [OK] to confirm the input and to close the window.

> AC142n appears in the tree structure of the project.
337
Option 2: configure the device without EDS file

► Select [Catalog]: I/O adapter ETHERNET MODULE (Generic Ethernet Module) and confirm with [Create].

>
4 Set the fieldbus parameters and the module configuration

► In the tree structure: double-click on [Controller ETIP_Controller] > [Controller Tags]
> The detailed view of the controller tags appears.
338
► Click on [_AC142n:C]
> The detailed view shows a table with the current values of the configuration assembly instance (device-specific
parameters, module configuration)
► For each row (= parameter): enter the desired parameter value in the [Value] column (→ Parameter setting via
the configuration assembly object (→ page 163))
► Save the project.
>
5 Transfer the set configuration to the controller (download)

► Set the communication path to the device (→ operating instructions RSLogix 5000).
► Transfer the project to the EtherNet/IP controller and start it.
> AC142n: the start screen shows the status of the EtherNet/IP connection:
EtherNet/IP active
>
6 Optional: import the description of the inputs and outputs into the project
► Download the I/O description file (→ Download the device and I/O description (→ page 95)).
► In RSLogix 5000: Select [Tools] > [Import] > [Tag and Logic Comments ...] to start the wizard for importing the I/O
description.
> The [Import] dialogue box appears.
339
► Select the downloaded file (*.csv) and click [Import] to load it.
► In the tree structure: double-click on [Controller Tags]
> [_AC142n:I] and [_AC142n:O] show descriptions of the inputs and outputs.
340
>
Configuration mode: Independent

12949
In configuration mode 'Independent', the device-specific parameters are set via the local display on the
AC142n (→ Set the configuration mode (→ page 98), → Set the EtherNet/IP module configuration
(→ page 101)). The assembly configuration defined in the projecting software is not evaluated.
Example: Configure AC142n in Independent mode and integrate in a RSLogix 5000 project
>
1 Preparations
► Connect AC142n to the → I/O scanner.
► Configure the IP settings of the configuration interface (X3) in line with the network requirements (→ Notes on IP
settings (→ page 89)).
► Enable the "independent" configuration mode (→ Set the configuration mode (→ page 98)).
► Download and unpack the ESD file (→ Download the device and I/O description (→ page 95)).
► Import the downloaded EDS file in RSLogix 5000 (→ operating instructions RSLogix 5000).
>
2 Set the device-specific parameters and the module configuration

► Set the fieldbus parameters
► Set the module configuration
→ Set the EtherNet/IP module configuration (→ page 101)
>
3 Open/Create a EtherNet/IP project

► Start RSLogix 5000.
► Open an existing EtherNet/IP project.
OR
Create a new EtherNet/IP project with the EtherNet/IP controller and I/O scanner.
>
4 Add AC142n to the project

► In the project structure: Right-click on [I/O Configuration] > [Name_des_I/O-Scanners] > [Ethernet]
> The context menu appears.
► Create a new device with [New Module].
> The dialogue box [Select Module Type] appears.
Option 1: configure the device using the EDS file
► In the [Catalog] tab, select AC1421 or AC1422 and confirm with [Create].
► Set the following parameters:
Name  short description of device e.g. _AC1421

 name appears in the tree structure of the RSLogix-5000
project
Description  detailed description of device (optional) e.g. I/O adapter
 max. 128 characters
IP address IP address of the device's EtherNet/IP interface e.g. 192.168.10.10
► In the group [Module Definition], press [Change ...].
341
> The [Module Definition] window appears.


342
Option 2: configure the device without EDS file

► Select [Catalog]: I/O adapter ETHERNET MODULE (Generic Ethernet Module) and confirm with [Create].
In the "independent" configuration mode, the value entered for [Assembly Instance] has no relevance since the
parameters are set directly on the device (→ Set the device-specific parameters and the module configuration
(→ page 341)).
Irrespective of the value entered for [Size], RSLogix 5000 creates a data field in the controller tags with a length of
251 bytes.

► AC142n appears in the tree structure of the project:
>
5 Transfer the set configuration to the controller (download)

► Set the communication path to the device (→ operating instructions RSLogix 5000).
► Transfer the project to the EtherNet/IP controller and start it.
> AC142n: the start screen shows the status of the EtherNet/IP connection:
EtherNet/IP active
>
343
6 Optional: import the description of the inputs and outputs into the project
► Download the I/O description file (→ Download the device and I/O description (→ page 95)).
► In RSLogix 5000: Select [Tools] > [Import] > [Tag and Logic Comments ...] to start the wizard for importing the I/O
description.
> The [Import] dialogue box appears.

► Select the downloaded file (*.csv) and click [Import] to load it.
► In the tree structure: double-click on [Controller Tags]
> [_AC142n:I] and [_AC142n:O] show descriptions of the inputs and outputs.
344
Appendix OSC messages
>
8.8 OSC messages
OSC messages: System ......................................................................................................................346

OSC messages: AS-i 1 / AS-i 2 ............................................................................................................347
18959
This section contains information about the messages for events, warnings and faults of the AC142n.
345
>
8.8.1 OSC messages: System

14284
Message Type Corrective measures
An internal device error was detected Error ► Note the message and contact the ifm service center
<Fehlernummer>
Permitted temperature limit value inside the Warning ► Check thermal conditions of the system environment
device was exceeded (<xxx.x> °C)
First operation after delivery Event not necessary
The output control was set to Event not necessary

<Gateway,manuell,SPS>
System power-up completed, <SW-Version> Event not necessary
A system reset was requested manually Event not necessary
The user-specific message history was deleted. Event not necessary
The device was reset to factory settings via Event not necessary
<HMI, Feldbus>.
PLC used for more than 10 hours. Event not necessary
The project <Name> was loaded. Event not necessary
The PLC was set to the operating mode Event not necessary
<Projektierungsmodus, geschützter Betrieb>.
The firmware was updated from <FW-Version> Event not necessary
to version <FW-Version>.
The settings of the fieldbus interface were Event not necessary
modified
The fieldbus connection was established Event not necessary
The fieldbus connection was aborted Event not necessary
The IP settings of the configuration interface Event not necessary
were changed
346
>
8.8.2 OSC messages: AS-i 1 / AS-i 2

16029
Message Type Corrective measures
System errors: AS-i master <1,2> Error ► Reboot the device

If the error occurs again:
► Note the message and contact the ifm service center!
Earth fault: AS-i <1,2> Error ► Check for earth fault of AC142n
Incorrect profile: AS-i <1,2>, slave <1(A)..31(A), Error ► Check profile of the AS-i slave
1B..31B> with profile <S-x.x.x> expected, but
<S-y.y.y> found.
Config error: AS-i <1,2>, slave <1(A)..31(A), Error ► Check connections of the AS-i slave
1B..31B> with the profile <S-x.x.x> missing ► Reconnect AS-i slave
Config error: AS-i <1,2>, slave <1(A)..31(A), Error ► Carry out projection process
1B..31B> with the profile <S-x.x.x> is available ([Quick setup] > [Project all])
but not projected
Protocol error: AS-i <1, 2>, slave <1(A)..31(A), Error ► Improve the transmission quality on the AS-i line
1B..31B> no data transmission
Double address detected: AS-i <1, 2>, slave Error ► Remove an AS-i slave with a double address from the
<1(A)..31(A), 1B..31B> AS-i network
► Readdress the remaining AS-i slave
► Reconnect removed AS-i slave to the AS-i network
The automatic addressing is not activated for Warning ► Activate automatic addressing
AS-i <1,2>. ([AS-i1]/[AS-i2] > [Master setup])
A voltage drop of 19.0 V was detected on AS-i Warning ► Check voltage supply of the device and replace if
master <1,2> necessary
A voltage drop of 22.5 V was detected on AS-i Warning ► Check voltage supply of the device and replace if
master <1,2> necessary
Increased message error rate: AS-i <1, 2>, slave Warning ► Improve the transmission quality on the AS-i line
<1(A)..31(A), 1B..31B>
Peripheral fault: AS-i <1, 2>, slave <1(A)..31(A), Warning ► Check displayed AS-i slave
1B..31B>
AS-i slave with address 0 cannot be Warning ► Activate automatic addressing
automatically readdressed (wrong profile) ([AS-i1]/[AS-i2] > [Master setup]
Manual output change: AS-i <1, 2>, slave Event not necessary
<1(A)..31(A), 1B..31B>, value: <0..F, 0..32768>
Manual parameter change: AS-i <1, 2>, slave Event not necessary
<1(A)..31(A), 1B..31B>, value: <0..F, 0..32768>
AS-i master <1,2> was switched to the Event not necessary
<geschützten Betrieb,Projektierungsmodus>
AS-i projection process was carried out. Event not necessary
AS-i slave with the address 0 was detected Event not necessary
347
Appendix Information on AS-i
>
8.9 Information on AS-i

6278
Here you will find further information for a better understanding of AS-Interface.
 E-learning program in the ifm download area:
→ www.ifm.com > Select your country > [Service] > [Download] > [Industrial communication]
> [AS-i Animations] > E-learning
 Literature: www.as-interface.net > [THE SYSTEM] > [Publications]
348
Glossary of Terms
master. Each of these slaves needs an

9 Glossary of Terms unambiguous address. The master cyclically
polls (→Polling)) all projected slaves and
A exchanges the up to 248 input data and
186 output data with them.
A/B slave → www.as-interface.net AS-International
AS-i slave with an A or B being appended to its Association (user association)
address number and which may therefore be >
present twice on the →master.

>
AS-i cycle
An AS-i cycle contains the data exchange of
Acyclic data transmission up to 31 slaves plus a telegram inclusion
In general data from the → master are phase plus, if required, a telegram
transmitted once per → cycle to one each of management phase (→ AS-i phases (status
the → slaves (= → cyclic data transmission). machine) (→ page 349)). In the case of the
Data transmission only at certain events (e.g. extended addressing mode, two AS-i cycles
when the device is switched on or when values are required for data transfer to all A/B slaves.
have been changed) is called acyclic data >
transmission.
>
AS-i phases (status machine)
Address
This is the "name" of the bus participant. All
participants need a unique address so that the
signals can be exchanged without problem.
>
Application software
Software specific to the application,
implemented by the machine manufacturer,
generally containing logic sequences, limits
and expressions that control the appropriate
inputs, outputs, calculations and decisions.
>
Architecture
Specific configuration of hardware and/or
software elements in a system.
>
AS-i
The AS-Interface (AS-i = Actuator Sensor  Offline phase: No AS-i data traffic takes
Interface) is a standard for fieldbus place during initialisation.
communication to EN 50295 and IEC 62026-2.  Detection phase: In the detection phase,
It was developed for the connection of the AS-i master first of all searches for
actuators and sensors with a simple wiring to existing slaves - irrespective of whether
replace the conventional parallel wiring. they are projected or not.
An unscreened two-wire yellow flat cable (max.  Activation phase: In this phase, the found
500 m) serves for data transmission as well as slaves are activated depending on the
for voltage supply (24...30 V DC) for the operating mode.
communication electronics and for participants  Data exchange phase: The AS-i master
with a low current requirement. Loads with a carries out cyclical data exchange with the
greater energy requirement additionally activated slaves.
receive a separate (black) flat cable for energy
supply with 24 V DC.  Management phase: At the end of a cycle
the AS-i master goes into the management
AS-Interface is a single master system. Up to phase, during which the master can send a
62 slaves can be connected per command to a specific slave (if requested).
349
Glossary of Terms
 Inclusion phase: After this, the AS-i master

goes into the inclusion phase, during which C
it sends a command to a free slave
address to detect new slaves. CCDI
>
CCDI = CTT Configuration Data Image =

ASIsafe current CTT configuration
Configuration of 7.4 and 7.5 slaves currently
The name for 'Safety at Work' used by
determined by the AS-i master:
Siemens.
>
- Manufacturer ID,
- Vendor ID,
Assembly Instance - Device ID,
Assembly Instances are parameters of a - Device Group ID.
>
logical connection (→Connection). The

describe which data at which length are to be CDI
transmitted between the communication
CDI = Configuration Data Image = current AS-i
nodes.
configuration
The following Assembly Instances exist: The configuration of the connected AS-i slaves
 Input determined by the AS-i master:
 Output LDS and AS-i profiles (IO, ID, ID1, ID2)
>
 Configuration
In a logical connection each of these Assembly CIP
Instances can only be used once . The CIP = Common Industrial Protocol
Assembly Instance type Configuration must Object-oriented description of a
only be used once in an Assembly Instance for communication protocol for industrial
one and the same communication node. requirements. Presently used for the fieldbus
>
systems DeviceNet, ControlNet and

B EtherNet/IP.
>
Baud CODESYS
Baud, abbrev.: Bd = unit for the data CODESYS® is a registered trademark of 3S –
transmission speed. Do not confuse baud with Smart Software Solutions GmbH, Germany.
"bits per second" (bps, bits/s). Baud indicates 'CODESYS for Automation Alliance' associates
the number of changes of state (steps, cycles) companies of the automation industry whose
per second over a transmission length. But it is hardware devices are all programmed with the
not defined how many bits per step are widely used IEC 61131-3 development tool
transmitted. The name baud can be traced CODESYS®.
back to the French inventor J. M. Baudot Homepage → www.codesys.com
whose code was used for telex machines.
>
1 MBd = 1024 x 1024 Bd = 1 048 576 Bd Connection

>
Describes the logical connection between 2

Burst errors application objects.
Burst errors are →faults occurring depending
>
on others. The class indicates the maximum ControllerE

permissible number of burst errors: Master in the AS-i bus system of the
Class 1 = high protection, generation E.
Class 2 = lower protection etc. >
>
CTT
Bus
e.g. CTT2 = Combined Transaction Type 2
Serial data transmission of several participants → Combined transaction – Use of analogue
on the same cable. channels in the gateway depending on the slave
profile (→ page 153)
>
>
350
Glossary of Terms
Cycle time >
This is the time for one cycle. The following Data type
happens:
Depending on the data type, values of different
 PLC cycle: The PLC program performs sizes can be stored.
one complete run.
Data size in the
 AS-i cycle: all AS-i slaves are updated min. value max. value
type memory
(5...10 ms).
BOOL FALSE TRUE 1 byte
The cycle time mainly depends on the AS-i
slaves involved in the data exchange. BYTE 0 255 1 byte
Message errors and management phase WORD 0 65 535 2 bytes
may extend the cycle time ( no constant
DWORD 0 4 294 967 295 4 bytes
cycle time).
>
SINT -128 127 1 byte
USINT 0 255 1 byte
Cyclic data transmission
Data are transmitted to one slave at a time by INT -32 768 32 767 2 bytes
the master once per cycle. UINT 0 65 535 2 bytes
>
DINT -2 147 483 648 2 147 483 647 4 bytes

Cyclical polling UDINT 0 4 294 967 295 4 bytes
AS-i master cyclically polls the data of all -3.402823466
→slaves in the →bus (see above). The data is REAL 3.402823466 • 1038 4 bytes
• 1038
updated in the →master after max. 5 ms. If
ULINT 0 18 446 744 073 709 551 615 8 Bytes
→A/B slaves are used, the →cycle time can be
extended to 10 ms. number of
STRING
>
char. + 1
D
>
DeviceNet
Data image (AS-i) Fieldbus system for larger data volumes based
See →process image; sum of all digital and on →CAN technology, requires special cables,
analogue input and output data. complex connection technology. Can be used
As regards the time, the data image represents e.g. as a supplier for AS-i over longer
the current condition of each individual slave distances. Corresponding →gateways are
and NOT a consistent image of the entire AS-i available.
>
network at an exact point in time.

DHCP
DHCP = Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
= protocol for the dynamic configuration by
the→host.
DHCP is a protocol that provides dynamic
configuration of IP addresses and associated
information. The protocol supports use of
IP addresses which are only available in
limited number by a centralised management
of the address assignment.
The participant logs on to a server with this
service when it is switched on in a network for
the first time. The server assigns a local free
→IP address to the participant.
>
Diagnosis
During the diagnosis, the "state of health" of
the device is checked. It is to be found out if
and what →faults are given in the device.
351
Glossary of Terms
Depending on the device, the inputs and (Mbps). Ethernet belongs to the family of
outputs can also be monitored for their correct so-called "optimum data transmission" on a
function. non exclusive transmission medium. The
- wire break, concept was developed in 1972 and specified
- short circuit, as IEEE 802.3 in 1985.
- value outside range. >
For diagnosis, configuration and log data can Explicit Messaging

be used, created during the "normal" operation
of the device. Acyclic data exchange between → I/O scanner
The correct start of the system components is and → I/O adapter based on the TCP/IP
monitored during the initialisation and start communication protocol.
>
phase. Errors are recorded in the log file.

For further diagnosis, self-tests can also be F
carried out.
>
FC
DRAM FC = flat cable. The yellow or black AS-i cable
is meant.
DRAM = Dynamic Random Access Memory. >
Technology for an electronic memory module

with random access (Random Access FE – functional earth
Memory, RAM). The memory element is a Functional earth is a reference potential which
capacitor which is either charged or is not connected to protective earth or only
discharged. It becomes accessible via a connected when special measures are taken.
switching transistor and is either read or The functional earth serves as equalisation of
overwritten with new contents. The memory potential for an ungrounded installation (e.g.
contents are volatile: the stored information is →SELV).
lost in case of lacking operating voltage or too >
late restart.
>
Fieldbus
E A →bus for industrial applications:
mechanically extremely robust and excellent
data protection.
EDS >
EDS = Electronic Data Sheet

An EDS is a device description fiile in ASCII Firmware
format, comparable to the GSD or the GSDML System software, basic program in the device,
file of Profibus or Profinet.
>
virtually the →runtime system.
The firmware establishes the connection
EMC between the hardware of the device and the
application program. The firmware is provided
EMC = Electro Magnetic Compatibility.
by the manufacturer of the controller as a part
According to the EC directive (2004/108/EEC)
of the system and cannot be changed by the
concerning electromagnetic compatibility (in
user.
short EMC directive) requirements are made >
for electrical and electronic apparatus,

equipment, systems or components to operate Flash memory
satisfactorily in the existing electromagnetic Flash ROM (or flash EPROM or flash memory)
environment. The devices must not interfere combines the advantages of semiconductor
with their environment and must not be memory and hard disks. Similar to a hard disk,
adversely influenced by external the data are however written and deleted
electromagnetic interference. blockwise in data blocks up to 64, 128, 256,
>
1024, ... bytes at the same time.

Ethernet Advantages of flash memories
Ethernet is a widely used,  The stored data are maintained even if
manufacturer-independent technology which there is no supply voltage.
enables data transmission in the network at a
speed of 10...10 000 million bits per second
352
Glossary of Terms
 Due to the absence of moving parts, flash

is noiseless and insensitive to shocks and Gateway transfer time
magnetic fields. The time that is needed for the input data in
Disadvantages of flash memories the DP-RAM of the AS-i master to be copied
 A storage cell can tolerate a limited into the output data of the netX, and vice
number of write and delete processes: versa. The distance from DP-RAM to DP-RAM
• Multi-level cells: typ. 10 000 cycles is decisive.
• Single level cells: typ. 100 000 cycles
>
 Given that a write process writes memory GPL

blocks of between 16 and 128 Kbytes at GPL = General Public Licence.
the same time, memory cells which require A licence issued by Free Software Foundation
no change are used as well. with copyleft for licensing of free software. The
thus licensed program can be used for all
>
FMEA purposes without any restriction. Commercial

use is expressly permitted.
FMEA = Failure Mode and Effects Analysis. >
Method of reliability engineering, to find

potential weak points. Within the framework of GSD
quality or security management, the FMEA is Generic Station Description
used preventively to prevent faults and Describes the interface to the device to be
increase the technical reliability. connected to the fieldbus.
>
You can find the current version of the GSD

FRAM file on the ifm homepage:
FRAM, or also FeRAM, means Ferroelectric → www.ifm.com > Select your country >
Random Access Memory. The storage [Service] > [Download] > [Industrial
operation and erasing operation is carried out communication]
by a polarisation change in a ferroelectric e.g. for AC1375:
layer.  GSD file for SmartLink AC1375
Advantages of FRAM as compared to  download the file ifm...07E5.gsd (... =
conventional read-only memories: version)
• non-volatile,
>
• compatible with common EEPROMs, but: GSDML

• access time approx. 100 ns,
• nearly unlimited access cycles possible. GSDML = Generic Station Description Markup
>
Language.
Description language which can describe the
G characteristics of a device family across
several levels. In this XML scheme, as much
Gateway as possible of the semantics of the GSD was
Gateway = access, coupler. adopted.
>
Gateways enable connection of completely

different systems. Gateways are used when H
two incompatible network types are to be
connected by converting the protocol of one HMI
system to the protocol of the other system.
Example: connection between AS-i and HMI = Human Machine Interface
>
higher-level fieldbus systems such as

Ethernet DP, DeviceNet, Interbus-S or Host
other interfaces, e.g. RS-485. The device
The controller in the hierarchy above the AS-i
includes an AS-i master which is directly
master, e.g. a PLC or a processor.
coupled to the host interface (e.g. Ethernet >
DP slave).
>
353
Glossary of Terms
I Intended use
Use of a product in accordance with the
I&M information provided in the instructions for use.
I&M = Identification & Maintenance >
 chapter I&M data IO-Link

 Profibus Profile Guidelines Part 1:
Identification & Maintenance Functions Point-to-point connection between 2 devices.
>
The following transmission is possible:
- binary signals or
I/O adapter - greater data fields for parameter setting.
Decentralised device in an EtherNet/IP → www.io-link.com
network (e.g. AC1421/AC1422) >
>
IP address
I/O scanner IP = Internet Protocol.
Coupling element for the connection of The IP address is a number which is
decentralised devices to an EtherNet/IP necessary to clearly identify an internet
controller. participant. For the sake of clarity the number
>
is written in 4 decimal values, e.g.

ID 127.215.205.156.
>
ID = Identifier
Name to differentiate the devices / participants J
connected to a system or the message
packets transmitted between the participants. Jitter
>
Jitter means a slight fluctuation in accuracy in

the transmission cycle when transmitting digital
IEC 61131
signals. More generally, jitter in transmission
Standard: Basics of programmable logic technology means an abrupt and undesired
controllers change of the signal characteristics.
• Part 1: General information >
• Part 2: Production equipment requirements

and tests L
• Part 3: Programming languages
• Part 5: Communication LAS
• Part 7: Fuzzy Control Programming List of Active →Slaves.
In this slave list the AS-i master enters the
>
Implicit Messaging slaves detected as active for this →master.

>
Cyclic data exchange between → I/O scanner

and → I/O adapter based on the UDP/IP LDS
communication protocol. Works based on the List of Detected →Slaves.
Producer-Consumer model, i.e. both In this slave list the AS-i master enters the
communication nodes know the structure of slaves detected as present for this →master.
the data to be exchanged before data >
transmission starts.
>
LED
Instructions LED = Light Emitting Diode.
Light emitting diode, also called luminescent
Superordinate word for one of the following
diode, an electronic element of high coloured
terms:
luminosity at small volume with negligible
installation instructions, data sheet, user
power loss.
information, operating instructions, device >
manual, installation information, online help,

system manual, programming manual, etc. LFS
List of Failed Slaves = list of →slaves with
>
configuration errors.
354
Glossary of Terms
In this slave list the AS-i master enters the

slaves with a projection error on this →master. Master-slave communication
>
AS-i strictly operates to the master-slave

Link principle. The master polls all slaves one after
the other in always the same order. Only one
A link is a cross-reference to another part in
master per network line is allowed (→cyclical
the document or to an external document.
>
polling).
>
LKCS MBd
LKCS = List of Known CTT Slaves
MegaBaud
In this list the CTT slaves (profile 7.4 and 7.5) Baud, abbrev.: Bd = unit for the data
which are indicated in the LDS and whose CTT transmission speed. Do not confuse baud with
configuration has already been read are "bits per second" (bps, bits/s). Baud indicates
entered. This list is independent of the LDS, the number of changes of state (steps, cycles)
LPS, LAS and LNACS. per second over a transmission length. But it is
not defined how many bits per step are
>
LNACS transmitted. The name baud can be traced

back to the French inventor J. M. Baudot
LNACS = List of Not Activated CTT Slaves whose code was used for telex machines.
In this list, the CTT slaves (profiles 7.4 and 1 MBd = 1024 x 1024 Bd = 1 048 576 Bd
7.5) which have been detected as CTT slaves >
but not activated are entered. As soon as the

slave is entered in the LAS, it is deleted from MMI
this list. These slaves only take part in the data → HMI (→ page 353)
exchange until the CTT configuration has been >
read.
>
Modbus
The Modbus protocol is a communication
LPS protocol based on a →master/slave
List of Projected →Slaves. architecture and was generated by Modicon
In this slave list the AS-i master enters the (since 1994: Groupe Schneider) in 1979 for
slaves projected for this →master. communication with its PLCs. In the industry,
>
Modbus has become a de facto standard.

Modbus/TCP is based on →Ethernet TCP/IP.
LSB Modbus/TCP ports the protocol defined for the
Least Significant Bit/Byte serial interface to TCP. The →IP address
>
clearly identifies each device in a network.

M Therefore the slave address was used to
identify one of several logical units (unit IDs) in
a physical device. To do so, the extended
MAC-ID IP addressing is used.
MAC = Manufacturer‘s Address Code Example: 192.168.83.28.1 means unit ID 1 on
= manufacturer's serial number. IP address 192.168.83.28.
→ID = Identifier >
Every network card has a MAC address, a

clearly defined worldwide unique numerical MRAM
code, more or less a kind of serial number. MRAM = Magnetoresistive Random Access
Such a MAC address is a sequence of Memory
6 hexadecimal numbers, e.g. The information is stored by means of
"00-0C-6E-D0-02-3F". magnetic storage elements. The property of
>
certain materials is used to change their

electrical resistance when exposed to
Master magnetic fields.
Handles the complete organisation on the bus. Advantages of MRAM as compared to
The master decides on the bus access time conventional RAM memories:
and polls the →slaves cyclically. • non volatile (like FRAM), but:
>
355
Glossary of Terms
• access time only approx. 35 ns, specification as PELV system to IEC 364-4-41
• unlimited number of access cycles possible. covers a measure to protect against direct and
>
indirect contact with dangerous voltages by a

"safe separation" between primary and
MSB secondary side in the device (e.g. power
Most Significant Bit/Byte supply to PELV specification).
>
For this reason no separate PE conductor is

O required in a PELV system. It is allowed to
ground circuits and / or bodies in a PELV
system.
OSC >
OSC = Online Support Center → Online Support

Center (OSC) (→ page 123) Pictogram
Help system in the device Pictograms are figurative symbols which
>
convey information by a simplified graphic

representation. (→ chapter What do the symbols
OSSD and formats mean?)
OSSD = Output Signal Switching Device >
= output signal of a safety switching device,

e.g. SafetySwitch, AS-i safety monitor. PLC configuration
>
Part of the CODESYS user interface.

P ► The programmer tells the programming
system which hardware is to be
Password programmed.
> CODESYS loads the corresponding
AS-i controllerE: in the menu [System Setup],
libraries.
menu item [Password] the handling can be
restricted or enabled. When delivered, the > Reading and writing the periphery states
device is in the user mode. By entering an (inputs/outputs) is possible.
invalid password (e.g. 1000) all menu items
>
which can change settings are blocked. Polling

>
to poll = to count votes

PCCD The controller master fetches the data from
PCCD = Projected CTT Configuration Data. every participant in the system successively:
Configuration data for the 7.4 and 7.5 slaves 1. Master calls participant 1.
stored in the device: 2. Participant 1 replies with its current data
• manufacturer ID, (actual values).
• vendor ID,
• device ID, 3. Master transfers more data (target values)
• device group ID. to participant 1, if needed.
>
4. Participant 1 acknowledges reception of
the data.
PCD
etc. the same procedure for each further
PCD = Projected Configuration Data participant.
Configuration data stored in the device: → LPS AS-i, →cyclical polling: AS-i master cyclically
and AS-i profile (IO, ID, ID1, ID2) polls the data of all →slaves in the →bus (see
above). The data is updated in the →master
>
PDM after max. 5 ms. If →A/B slaves are used, the

→cycle time can be extended to 10 ms.
PDM = Process and Dialogue Module. >
Device for communication of the operator with

the machine / plant. Power-on delay time
The time required by the controller K6 from the
>
PELV application of the voltage supply until all of the

following targets are reached:
PELV = Protective Extra Low Voltage
Functional extra low voltage with safe  both AS-i networks have reached normal
separation, grounded variant of →SELV. The operation
356
Glossary of Terms
 the master has read the configuration data & Profinet International (PI) for automation.
of the CTTx slaves Profinet uses TCP/IP and IT standards, is
 the field buses can use the gateway real-time Ethernet compatible and enables the
(optional) integration of fieldbus systems.
The Profinet concept has a modular design, so
 the PLC program was started (optional).
>
that the user can choose the functionality
himself. This is basically different as regards
Process image the type of data exchange, to meet the
Process image is the status of the inputs and requirements regarding the speed.
outputs the PLC operates with within one For Profinet, there are the two perspectives
→cycle. Profinet-CBA and Profinet-IO:
 At the beginning of the cycle the PLC  Profinet-CBA (Component Based
reads the conditions of all inputs into the Automation) is intended for the
process image. component-based communication via
During the cycle the PLC cannot detect TCP/IP and the real-time communication
changes to the inputs. for real-time requirements in modular plant
 During the cycle the outputs are only construction. Both ways of communication
changed virtually (in the process image). can be used in parallel.
 At the end of the cycle the PLC writes the  Profinet-IO has been created for real-time
virtual output states to the real outputs. (RT) and synchronous communication IRT
>
(IRT = isochronous real-time) with the
decentralised periphery. The designations
Profibus RT and IRT only describe the real-time
PROFIBUS (Process Field Bus) is a standard characteristics in the communication within
for →fieldbus communication in automation Profinet-IO.
technology. There are two versions of
PROFIBUS, DP being the one most widely → www.profibus.com (umbrella organisation)
used.
 PROFIBUS-DP (decentralised periphery)
for the control of sensors and actuators by >
a central controller in manufacturing

engineering and for networking of several R
controllers among each other. Data rates
up to 12 Mbits/s on twisted two-wire cables Redundant
and/or fibre optics are possible. Redundancy is the presence of more than the
 PROFIBUS-PA (process automation) is necessary means so that a function unit
used for the control of measurement performs a requested function or that data can
devices by a process control system in represent information.
process technology and is suited for Several kinds of redundancy are distinguished:
hazardous areas (zones 0 and 1). Only a  Functional redundancy aims at designing
limited current flows on the bus cables in safety-related systems in multiple ways in
an intrinsically safe circuit so that even in parallel so that in the event of a →failure of
case of a problem no explosive sparks can one component the others ensure the task.
occur. A disadvantage of PROFIBUS-PA is
the relatively slow data transfer rate of  In addition it is tried to separate redundant
31.25 Kbits/s. systems from each other with regard to
space. Thus the →risk that they are
affected by a common interference is
 www.profibus.com (umbrella organisation) minimised.
 Finally, components from different
>
manufacturers are sometimes used to
avoid that a systematic fault causes all
Profinet redundant systems to fail (→diverse
redundancy).
PROFINET (Process Field Network) is the
open Industrial Ethernet Standard of Profibus
357
Glossary of Terms
The software of redundant systems should

differ in the following aspects: S
• specification (different teams),
• specification language, SD card
• programming (different teams), An SD memory card (short for Secure Digital
• programming language,
Memory Card) is a digital storage medium that
• compiler.
>
operates to the principle of →flash storage.
>
remanent Self-test
Remanent data is protected against data loss
Test program that actively tests components or
in case of power failure.
devices. The program is started by the user
The →runtime system for example
and takes a certain time. The result is a test
automatically copies the remanent data to a protocol (log file) which shows what was tested
→flash memory as soon as the voltage supply and if the result is positive or negative.
falls below a critical value. If the voltage supply >
is available again, the runtime system loads

the remanent data back to the RAM memory. SELV
The data in the RAM memory of a controller, SELV = Safety Extra Low Voltage
however, is volatile and normally lost in case of Active parts of safety extra low voltage circuits
power failure. must neither be connected to ground nor to
>
protective wires of other circuits. They must be

RPI safely separated from active parts with higher
voltage.
RPI = Requested Packet Intervall
SELV circuit = secondary circuit (output
>
voltage) which is rated and protected so that
its voltages do not exceed a safe value in case
RTC of correct operation (of the power supply) or in
RTC = Real Time Clock case of a single →fault (of the power supply).
Provides (batter-backed) the current date and SELV circuits are separated from the input
time. Frequent use for the storage of error voltage (mains voltage) by double or enhanced
message protocols. insulation. The voltage value must not exceed
> 60 V DC (or 42.4 V AC).
>
RTS
Single slave
RTS = Runtime System
Runtime systems are basic versions of →Slave whose address number may only
applications. These minimum versions are occur once on the →master.
supplied with certain products to meet the
>
prerequisites for the execution of the actual Slave

product or to be able to look at or use results
generated by this product on other processors: Passive participant on the bus, only replies on
making available all routines required to request of the →master. Slaves have a clearly
execute a program in a programming defined and unique →address in the bus.
language, e.g. interactions with the →runtime
>
system, memory requirements, error routines, Slave configuration

inputs and outputs.
>
The following terms need to be distinguished...
• AS-i projected configuration (→PCD
Runtime system (→ page 356)),
Basic program in the device, establishes the • AS-i current configuration (→CDI
connection between the hardware of the (→ page 350)),
device and the application program. • CTT projected configuration (→PCCD
>
(→ page 356)),
• CTT current configuration (→CCDI
(→ page 350)).
>
358
Glossary of Terms
Symbols Unit ID
Pictograms are figurative symbols which →Modbus
convey information by a simplified graphic >
representation. (→ chapter What do the symbols

and formats mean?) Use, intended
> Use of a product in accordance with the
information provided in the instructions for use.
System variable >
Variable to which access can be made via IEC

address or symbol name from the PLC.
W
Watchdog
>
T In general the term watchdog is used for a

component of a system which watches the
Target function of other components. If a possible
The target contains the hardware description malfunction is detected, this is either signalled
of the target device for CODESYS, e.g.: inputs or suitable program branchings are activated.
and outputs, memory, file locations. The signal or branchings serve as a trigger for
Corresponds to an electronic data sheet. other co-operating system components to
>
solve the problem.
TCP
The Transmission Control Protocol is part of
the TCP/IP protocol family. Each TCP/IP data
connection has a transmitter and a receiver.
This principle is a connection-oriented data
transmission. In the TCP/IP protocol family the
TCP as the connection-oriented protocol
assumes the task of data protection, data flow
control and takes measures in the event of
data loss. (compare: →UDP)
>
U
UDP
UDP (User Datagram Protocol) is a minimal
connectionless network protocol which belongs
to the transport layer of the internet protocol
family. The task of UDP is to ensure that data
which is transmitted via the internet is passed
to the right application.
At present network variables based on →CAN
and UDP are implemented. The values of the
variables are automatically exchanged on the
basis of broadcast messages. In UDP they are
implemented as broadcast messages, in CAN
as →PDOs.
According to the protocol, these services are
unconfirmed data transmission: it is not
checked whether the receiver receives the
message. Exchange of network variables
corresponds to a "1 to n connection"
(1 transmitter to n receivers).
>
359
Index
Combined transaction – Use of analogue channels in the gateway

10 Index depending on the slave profile ............................................................153
Command 07 (0x0007) - Set the auto address mode of the AS-i
A master ..................................................................................................281
Command 01 (0x0001) – Change parameters of an AS-i slave .........274
A/B slave ..............................................................................................349 Command 03 (0x0003) – Project the currrent AS-i network ...............276
Acyclic data ................................................................................. 157, 217 Command 04 (0x0004) – Change LPS ...............................................277
Acyclic data records.............................................................................220 Command 05 (0x0005) – Change the operating mode of the AS-i
Acyclic data transmission ....................................................................349 master ..................................................................................................278
Add AC142n to the project ......................................................... 336, 341 Command 06 (0x0006) – Change AS-i slave address........................279
Additional functions................................................................................40 Command 09 (0x0009) – Change extended ID1 in the AS-i slave .....282
Address ................................................................................................349 Command 10 (0x000A) - Change PCD ...............................................284
Address assignment in Ethernet networks ..........................................132 Command 13 (0x000D) – AS-i master supply voltage, symmetry, earth
Adopt the system time of the PC ...........................................................83 fault ......................................................................................................287
Analogue input .......................................................................................61 Command 21 (0x0015) – Read ID string of an AS-i profile (S-7.4) ....289
Analogue output.....................................................................................62 Command 257 (0x0101) – Quick setup AS-i master 1 + 2 .................251
Appendix ..............................................................................................126 Command 259 (0x0103) – Select user language................................253
Application software.............................................................................349 Command 26 (0x001A) – Read AS-i master info ................................292
Approval tests / certifications ...............................................................127 Command 260 (0x0104) – Change display settings ...........................255
Architecture..........................................................................................349 Command 261 (0x0105) – Set output control .....................................256
Arrow and function keys ........................................................................17 Command 262 (0x0106) – Set PLC operating mode ..........................257
Arrow keys .............................................................................................21 Command 265 (0x0109) – Set date/time ............................................258
AS-i ......................................................................................................349 Command 266 (0x010A) – Set parameters of the NTP server ...........260
AS-i 1 / AS-i 2 ........................................................................................56 Command 267 (0x010B) – Read date / time / NTP settings ...............262
AS-i slaves..................................................................................................... 61 Command 268 (0x010C) – Reboot system .........................................264
Diagnosis ....................................................................................................... 59 Command 269 (0x010D) – Read fieldbus info ....................................266
Master setup .................................................................................................. 57 Command 272 (0x0110) – Display target visualisation.......................267
AS-i cycle .............................................................................................349 Command 28 (0x001C) – Deactivate slave reset when changing to the
AS-i master ..........................................................................................136 protected mode ....................................................................................293
AS-i master commands .......................................................................268 Command 33 (0x0021) - Read diagnosis string of an AS-i slave (S-7.4)
AS-i master status flags.......................................................................140 .............................................................................................................294
AS-i phases (status machine)..............................................................349 Command 34 (0x0022) - Read parameter string of an AS-i slave (S-7.4)
.............................................................................................................296
AS-i slaves ...........................................................................................144
Command 35 (0x0022) - Write parameter string of an AS-i slave (S-7.4)
ASIsafe ................................................................................................350
.............................................................................................................298
Assembly Instance...............................................................................350
Command 36 (0x0024) – CTT2 Standard ...........................................300
B Command 37 (0x0025) – CTT2 standard write ...................................302
Command 38 (0x0026) – CTT2 Vendor Specific Read ......................304
Baud.....................................................................................................350 Command 39 (0x0027) – CTT2 Vendor Specific Write.......................306
Behaviour of the settings upon firmware update .................................114 Command 64 (0x0040) – CTT2 device group read ............................308
Binary field .............................................................................................38 Command 65 (0x0041) – CTT2 Device Group Write ..........................310
Burst errors ..........................................................................................350 Command 66 (0x0042) – CTT2 Vendor Specific Selective Read From
Bus .......................................................................................................350 Buffer ...................................................................................................312
Button.....................................................................................................28 Command 67 (0x0043) – CTT2 Vendor Specific Selective Write From
Buffer ...................................................................................................314
C Command 68 (0x0044) – CTT2 Vendor Specific Selective Read.......316
Carry out a projection adaptation ..........................................................58 Command 69 (0x0045) – CTT2 Vendor Specific Selective Write .......318
CCDI ....................................................................................................350 Command 70 (0x0046) – CTT2 device group selective Rread ...........320
CDI .......................................................................................................350 Command 71 (0x0047) – CTT2 Device Group Selective Write ..........322
Change an AS-i slave address ..............................................................65 Command 73 (0x0049) – CTT2 Vendor Specific Exchange ...............324
Change an AS-i slave parameter output ...............................................65 Command 74 (0x004A) – CTT2 Device Group Exchange ..................326
Change the analogue output values manually ......................................63 Command 75 (0x004B) – CTT2 Device Group Selective Read From
Change the basic settings of the device .............................................112 Buffer ...................................................................................................328
Change the digital output values manually ...........................................63 Command 76 (0x004C) – CTT2 Device Group Selective Write From
Buffer ...................................................................................................330
Change the Extended ID1 of the AS-i slave..........................................66
Command 80 (0x0050) – Adjust AS-i master settings ........................332
Checkbox ...............................................................................................28
Command 81 (0x0051) – Reset error counter ....................................333
CIP .......................................................................................................350
Command channels.............................................................................247
Clone device configuration ....................................................................84
Command reply channel (device >>> fieldbus master) ......................267
CODESYS ...........................................................................................350
Command request channel (fieldbus master >>> device) 251, 253, 255,
CODESYS PLC .....................................................................................17 256, 257, 258, 260, 262, 264, 266, 267, 274, 276, 277, 278, 279, 281,
Combined transaction..........................................................................153
360
Index
282, 284, 287, 289, 292, 293, 294, 296, 298, 300, 302, 304, 306, 308, List of slaves with wrong slave profile................................................. 201, 204
310, 312, 314, 316, 318, 320, 322, 324, 326, 328, 330, 332, 333 Master flags ......................................................................................... 209, 212
Command response channel (device >>> fieldbus master) ..... 252, 254, peripheral fault (LPF)........................................................................... 210, 212
255, 256, 257, 259, 261, 263, 265, 266, 275, 276, 277, 278, 280, 281, Diagnosis - AS-i master 2
283, 286, 288, 290, 292, 293, 295, 297, 299, 301, 303, 305, 307, 309, AS-i diagnosis.............................................................................................. 205
311, 313, 315, 317, 319, 321, 323, 325, 327, 329, 331, 332, 333 configuration error ....................................................................................... 214
Command status..................................................................................248 list of detected slaves (LDS) ....................................................................... 213
Configuration data (CDI) of the slaves (slave profiles) .......................146 list of missing slaves.................................................................................... 205
Configuration interface ........................................................................111 list of multiple addressed slaves ................................................................. 207
connection concepts ................................................................................... 133 List of non-projected slaves ........................................................................ 206
Configuration mode .............................................................................335 list of peripheral faults ................................................................................. 206
Independent................................................................................................. 341 List of slaves with wrong slave profile......................................................... 206
Top-down..................................................................................................... 336 Master flags ................................................................................................. 213
Configuration of the analogue channels in slots 9 ... 12 .....................193 peripheral fault (LPF)................................................................................... 214
Configure the IP parameters automatically .....................................90, 97 Diagnosis - system diagnosis ..................................................... 199, 204
Configure the IP parameters manually ............................................90, 97 Digital input ............................................................................................61
Confirmation message...........................................................................35 Digital output ..........................................................................................62
Connect and address AS-i slaves .......................................................118 Direct link .............................................................................................134
Connect the device ..............................................................................111 Disconnect from web interface ..............................................................43
Connection...........................................................................................350 Display ...................................................................................................17
Connection via Ethernet network ........................................................135 Display and reset performance data .....................................................60
Control a single PLC application ...........................................................70 Display and reset the error counters .....................................................59
Control of the graphical user interface ..................................................20 Display diagnostic data ..................................................................87, 103
Control PLC applications .......................................................................71 Display elements ...........................................................................17, 129
ControllerE ...........................................................................................350 Display EtherNet/IP data .......................................................................94
CTT ......................................................................................................350 Display information about PLC projects ................................................69
CTT2 error object.................................................................................273 Display power-on time ...........................................................................87
Cycle time ............................................................................................351 Display the error statistics of the AS-i slaves ........................................59
Cyclic data .................................................................................. 157, 181 Display the input/output data of the AS-i slave .....................................61
Cyclic data transmission ......................................................................351 Display the module configuration ..........................................................94
Cyclical polling .....................................................................................351 Display the status of the CODESYS PLC .............................................69
Display the voltage supply analysis.......................................................60
D Download the device and I/O description..............................................95
DRAM ..................................................................................................352
DAE/EE flags .......................................................................................143
DS1 – System information ...................................................................222
Data image (AS-i) ................................................................................351
DS10 – Slave list LPS .......................................................................234
Data type..............................................................................................351
DS11 – Current configuration data CDI...............................................235
Derivation of parameter values for free slave assignment ..................180
DS12 – Projected configuration data PCD ..........................................237
Description of the control elements .......................................................26
DS13 – Image of the input parameters of the slaves ..........................239
Description of the extended ID code 1 ................................................148
DS14 – Image of the output parameters of the slaves........................240
Description of the extended ID code 2 ................................................149
DS15 – Slave error counter, configuration error counter, AS-i cycle
Description of the ID code (selection) .................................................148
counter .................................................................................................241
Description of the IO code for digital slaves ........................................147
DS17 – Error lists LCEMS, LCEAS, LDAE .........................................244
Details 4 channels per analogue slave....................................... 229, 230
DS18 – Fieldbus information ...............................................................245
Details of the 5-word areas......................................................... 225, 227
DS2 – Digital inputs of the slaves and master flags ............................223
Details of the error lists ........................................................................244
DS3 – Analogue inputs of slaves 1(A)...15(B).....................................224
Details of the slave lists .............................................................. 233, 234
DS4 – Analogue inputs of slaves 16(A)...31(B)...................................226
Device temperature ...............................................................................87
DS5 – Digital outputs of the slaves .....................................................228
DeviceNet ............................................................................................351
DS6 – Analogue outputs of slaves 1(A)...15(B) ..................................229
Device-specific parameters ........................................................ 159, 164
DS7 – Analogue outputs of slaves 16(A)...31(B) ................................230
DHCP ...................................................................................................351
DS8 – Status of the analogue output data of the slaves 1...31 ...........231
Diagnosis .............................................................................................351
DS9 – Slave lists LAS, LDS, LPF, LCE ...............................................233
Diagnosis - AS-i master 1
AS-i diagnosis ..................................................................................... 200, 204 E
configuration error ............................................................................... 210, 212
list of detected slaves (LDS) ............................................................... 209, 212 EDS......................................................................................................352
list of missing slaves ................................................................................... 204 EDS-file ................................................................................................180
List of missing slaves .................................................................................. 201 EMC .....................................................................................................352
list of multiple addressed slaves ......................................................... 202, 204 Enable/Disable the device-internal PLC ................................................76
List of non-projected slaves ................................................................ 201, 204 Error codes of the AS-i master commands .........................................271
list of peripheral faults ................................................................................. 204 Ethernet ...............................................................................................352
List of peripheral faults ................................................................................ 202
Ethernet configuration interface ............................................................18
361
Index
EtherNet/IP ifm weltweit • ifm worldwide • ifm à l’échelle internationale.................365

Diagnosis ..................................................................................................... 103 Implicit Messaging ...............................................................................354
Information ..................................................................................................... 93 Information concerning the device ........................................................15
Setup ............................................................................................................. 96 Information on AS-i ..............................................................................348
EtherNet/IP fieldbus interface ................................................................18 Install multi app ....................................................................................108
EtherNet/IP interface ...........................................................................111 Install single/basic app ........................................................................107
EtherNet/IP modules............................................................................182 Instructions ..........................................................................................354
Example .................................................................................................24 Intended use ..................................................................................14, 354
structure of the digital input data ................................................................. 187
Interfaces ................................................................................ 18, 88, 130
Examples .............................................................................................180 Configuration interface .................................................................................. 89
Exchange AS-i slave............................................................................119 EtherNet/IP interface ..................................................................................... 92
Execution control flags ........................................................................141 IO code ................................................................................................147
Explicit Messaging ...............................................................................352 IO-Link .................................................................................................354
Extended ID code 2 for analogue slaves with profile 7.3.x .................149 IP address............................................................................................354
Extended ID code 2 for analogue slaves with profile 7.4.x .................149
Extended ID-Code 1 ............................................................................148 J
Extended ID-Code 2 ............................................................................149 Jitter .....................................................................................................354
F L
FC ........................................................................................................352 LAS ......................................................................................................354
FE – functional earth ...........................................................................352 LDS ......................................................................................................354
Fieldbus ...............................................................................................352 LED ......................................................................................................354
Fieldbus EtherNet/IP............................................................................155 Legal and copyright information ..............................................................6
Fieldbus objects ...................................................................................156 LFS ......................................................................................................354
Fieldbus parameters ............................................................................158 Link ......................................................................................................355
Firmware ..............................................................................................352 List .........................................................................................................29
Firmware update from SD card ...........................................................115 LKCS....................................................................................................355
Firmware update via the web interface ...............................................116 LNACS .................................................................................................355
Flash memory ......................................................................................352 Locate error sources............................................................................122
FMEA ...................................................................................................353 LPS ......................................................................................................355
FRAM ...................................................................................................353 LSB ......................................................................................................355
Free slave addresses
colour code + symbols .................................................................................. 33 M
Free slave addresses, overview ............................................................33
MAC-ID ................................................................................................355
Function keys.........................................................................................21
Mapping of the digital input/output data ..............................................187
G Master ..................................................................................................355
Master flags .........................................................................................139
Gateway ...............................................................................................353
Master-slave communication ...............................................................355
Gateway transfer time .........................................................................353
MBd......................................................................................................355
General ..................................................................................................40
Meaning of the colour combinations......................................................34
General error codes.............................................................................272
Meaning of the colour combinations (example
Getting started .........................................................................................8
configuration error type 2) ............................................................................. 32
GPL ......................................................................................................353 Menu ......................................................................................................44
GSD .....................................................................................................353 Menu navigation ....................................................................................22
GSDML ................................................................................................353 Menu view ..............................................................................................22
Message types.....................................................................................122
H
MMI ......................................................................................................355
HMI ......................................................................................................353 Modbus ................................................................................................355
Host......................................................................................................353 Modification history ..................................................................................9
Host flags .............................................................................................142 Module setting
Housing ................................................................................................129 AC13x7 AS-i 1 ............................................................................................. 208
AC13x7 AS-i 1+2 ......................................................................................... 211
I AC1421 ........................................................................................................ 198
AC1422 ........................................................................................................ 203
I&M.......................................................................................................354
I/O adapter ...........................................................................................354 MRAM ..................................................................................................355
I/O scanner ..........................................................................................354 MSB .....................................................................................................356
ID .........................................................................................................354 N
ID code.................................................................................................148
IEC 61131 ............................................................................................354 Navigate on a page................................................................................25
ifm system solutions ............................................................................104 Navigation aids ......................................................................................23
362
Index
Notes on ifm system solutions.............................................................105 293, 295, 297, 299, 301, 303, 305, 307, 309, 311, 313, 315, 317, 319,
Notes on IP settings.........................................................................89, 96 321, 323, 325, 327, 329, 331, 332, 333
Numerical field .......................................................................................36 Power supply connections ...................................................................129
Power-on delay time ............................................................................356
O Preliminary note .......................................................................................5
Online diagnosis function ....................................................................122 Preparations ............................................................... 115, 116, 336, 341
Online Support Center (OSC)..............................................................123 Principle of the command channels ....................................................248
Open/Create a EtherNet/IP project ............................................ 336, 341 Process image .....................................................................................357
Operating elements ...............................................................................17 Profibus ................................................................................................357
Operating instructions............................................................................41 Profiles of AS-i slaves..........................................................................145
Operating modes of the AS-i master ...................................................137 Profinet.................................................................................................357
Operation .......................................................................................19, 129 Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) ................................................131
Option 1 Programmers' notes
Transmit fieldbus and web interface data via different networks ............... 135 call up acyclic services ................................................................................ 334
Option 2 Prohibited use ........................................................................................14

transfer fieldbus and web interface data over the same network .............. 135 Projection mode ...................................................................................138
Optional Protected mode ...................................................................................138
adjust the IP parameters ............................................................................. 116 Purpose of the document ........................................................................6
import the description of the inputs and outputs into the project ....... 339, 344
switch the language with a key combination ................................................ 78 Q
OSC .....................................................................................................356 Quick setup ............................................................................................46
Show message history ................................................................................ 125 Access the device via QR code .................................................................... 49
View current error messages ...................................................................... 124 Address the AS-i slaves connected to AS-i master 1 ................................... 54
OSC messages....................................................................................345 Address the AS-i slaves connected to AS-i master 2 ................................... 55
AS-i 1 / AS-i 2 .............................................................................................. 347 Configure the EtherNet/IP interface .............................................................. 50
System ......................................................................................................... 346 Configure the operating mode of the AS-i masters ...................................... 48
OSSD ...................................................................................................356 Configure the output access ......................................................................... 49
Overview Project AS-i networks .................................................................................... 47
acyclic data .................................................................................................. 218 Set the configuration interface ...................................................................... 52
Acyclic data sets .......................................................................................... 221 Set the configuration mode ........................................................................... 51
AS-i master commands ............................................................................... 269
System commands ...................................................................................... 250 R
User documentation for AC14......................................................................... 8
Reboot the device ....................................................................... 115, 117
Overview of free slave addresses .........................................................33 Recommended browsers.......................................................................40
Overview of slave states........................................................................31 Redundant ...........................................................................................357
P remanent ..............................................................................................358
Remote access ......................................................................................39
Page view ..............................................................................................25 Required accessories ............................................................................18
Parameter data ....................................................................................156 Required background knowledge ..........................................................11
Parameter input .....................................................................................62 Restore the device configuration ...........................................................85
Parameter setting via the configuration assembly object....................163 RPI .......................................................................................................358
Parameters RTC......................................................................................................358
Independent mode ...................................................................................... 160
RTS ......................................................................................................358
Top-down mode .......................................................................................... 161
Runtime system ...................................................................................358
Parameters of the fieldbus slots ..........................................................174
Password .............................................................................................356 S
PCCD ...................................................................................................356
Safety instructions .................................................................................10
PCD .....................................................................................................356
Save the device configuration ...............................................................84
PDM .....................................................................................................356
SD card ................................................................................................358
PELV ....................................................................................................356
SD card slot ...........................................................................................18
Permitted use.........................................................................................14
Self-test ................................................................................................358
Pictogram .............................................................................................356
SELV ....................................................................................................358
PLC
Set the behaviour of the display ............................................................79
Diagnosis ....................................................................................................... 73
Information ..................................................................................................... 69 Set the configuration mode....................................................................98
Settings .......................................................................................................... 70 Set the device cycle ...............................................................................77
PLC configuration ................................................................................356 Set the device-specific parameters .......................................................99
Please note! ...........................................................................................11 Set the device-specific parameters and the module configuration .....341
Polling ..................................................................................................356 Set the EtherNet/IP module configuration ...........................................101
Possible command error codes . 252, 254, 255, 256, 257, 259, 261, 263, Set the fieldbus parameters and the module configuration.................338
265, 266, 267, 275, 276, 277, 278, 280, 281, 283, 286, 288, 291, 292, Set the monitoring functions of the AS-i master ....................................58
363
Index
Set the operating mode of the AS-i master ...........................................57 Diagnosis ....................................................................................................... 87
Set the output access ............................................................................75 Information ..................................................................................................... 74
Set the system time ...............................................................................80 Programmable Logic Controller (PLC).......................................................... 68
Setup ............................................................................................................. 75
Set the system time manually................................................................81
System commands ..............................................................................249
Setting RTC ...........................................................................................80
System description ................................................................................13
Setup....................................................................................................110
System reset ..........................................................................................86
Setup of EtherNet/IP ............................................................................118
System variable ...................................................................................359
Setup of the configuration interface.....................................................118
Show AS-i slave information..................................................................64 T
Show EtherNet information....................................................................91
Show information ...................................................................................93 Tab menu/Tab .......................................................................................27
Show information about installed ifm apps..........................................106 Table
Fixed slave assignment for slots 9 ... 12 .................................................... 194
Show memory used ...............................................................................73
Master flags ................................................................................................. 188
Show target visualisation .......................................................................72
variable slave assignment for slots 9 ... 12................................................. 196
Show version information ......................................................................74
Tampering with the unit .........................................................................12
Single slave .........................................................................................358
Target...................................................................................................359
Slave ....................................................................................................358
TCP ......................................................................................................359
Slave addresses, free ............................................................................33
Technical data .....................................................................................128
Slave configuration ..............................................................................358
Transfer the set configuration to the controller (download)........ 339, 343
Slave profile .........................................................................................147
Troubleshooting ...................................................................................120
Slave profiles for slaves with combined transaction ...........................153
Types of ifm system solutions .............................................................105
Slave selector ........................................................................................30
Slave status U
colour code + symbols .................................................................................. 31
overview ........................................................................................................ 31 UDP .....................................................................................................359
Overview ........................................................................................................ 31 Uninstall ifm apps ................................................................................109
Slot 1 – Digital input data single or A slaves, AS-i master 1 ...............183 Unit ID ..................................................................................................359
Slot 10 – Analogue input data .............................................................190 Update ifm apps...................................................................................109
Slot 11 – Analogue output data ...........................................................191 Update the firmware ................................................................... 115, 117
Slot 12 – Analogue output data ...........................................................192 Update the firmware of the device .......................................................114
Slot 13 – Diagnostic data.....................................................................197 Use navigation aids ...............................................................................25
Slot 14 – Inputs from PLC ...................................................................215 Use, intended.......................................................................................359
Slot 15 – Outputs to PLC .....................................................................216
Slot 2 – Digital output data single or A slaves, AS-i master 1.............183
V
Slot 3 – Digital input data single or A slaves, AS-i master 2 ...............184 Valid combinations IO code / ID code / extended ID code 2...............150
Slot 4 – Digital output data single or A slaves, AS-i master 2.............184
Slot 5 – Digital input data B slaves, AS-i master 1..............................185 W
Slot 6 – Digital output data B slaves, AS-i master 1 ...........................185 watchdog..............................................................................................359
Slot 7 – Digital input data B slaves, AS-i master 2..............................186 Watchdog .............................................................................................359
Slot 8 – Digital output data B slaves, AS-i master 2 ...........................186 Web interface
Slot 9 – Analogue input data ...............................................................189 Access ........................................................................................................... 41
Standard CTT2 error codes .................................................................273 navigation ...................................................................................................... 41
Start screen ...........................................................................................45 Password protection ...................................................................................... 42
Start screen 'Basic settings'.................................................................111 Web interface login ................................................................................42
Start the recovery mode ............................................................. 115, 116 Where is what on the AS-i device? .......................................................16
Start-up behaviour of the controller .......................................................12
Status LED...........................................................................................121
Basic device ................................................................................................ 121
fieldbus EtherNet/IP .................................................................................... 121
Status LEDs ...........................................................................................17
Store diagnostic protocol .......................................................................86
Structure of the slave profile ................................................................147
Switch operating modes ......................................................................138
Switch the menu language ....................................................................78
Symbols ...............................................................................................359
free slave addresses ..................................................................................... 33
slave status.................................................................................................... 31
Symbols and formats used ......................................................................7
Synchronise the system time with an NTP server.................................82
System ...................................................................................................67
364
11 ifm weltweit • ifm worldwide • ifm à l’échelle
internationale
Version: 2015-03-06 8310
www.ifm.com • Email: info@ifm.com

Service hotline: 0800 / 16 16 16 (only Germany, Mo-Fr 07.00...18.00 h)
ifm Niederlassungen • Sales offices • Agences
D ifm electronic gmbh Vertrieb Deutschland
Niederlassung Nord • 31135 Hildesheim • Tel. 0 51 21 / 76 67-0
Niederlassung West • 45128 Essen • Tel. 02 01 / 3 64 75 -0
Niederlassung Mitte-West • 58511 Lüdenscheid • Tel. 0 23 51 / 43 01-0
Niederlassung Süd-West • 64646 Heppenheim • Tel. 0 62 52 / 79 05-0
Niederlassung Baden-Württemberg • 73230 Kirchheim • Tel. 0 70 21 / 80 86-0
Niederlassung Bayern • 82178 Puchheim • Tel. 0 89 / 8 00 91-0
Niederlassung Ost • 07639 Tautenhain • Tel. 0 36 601 / 771-0
ifm electronic gmbh • Friedrichstraße 1 • 45128 Essen
A ifm electronic gmbh • 1120 Wien • Tel. +43 16 17 45 00

OFF ifm efector pty ltd. • Mulgrave Vic 3170 • Tel. +61 3 00 365 088
B, L ifm electronic N.V. • 1731 Zellik • Tel. +32 2 / 4 81 02 20
BR ifm electronic Ltda. • 03337-000, Sao Paulo SP • Tel. +55 11 / 2672-1730
CH ifm electronic ag • 4 624 Härkingen • Tel. +41 62 / 388 80 30
CN ifm electronic (Shanghai) Co. Ltd. • 201203 Shanghai • Tel. +86 21 / 3813 4800
CND ifm efector Canada inc. • Oakville, Ontario L6K 3V3 • Tel. +1 800-441-8246
CZ ifm electronic spol. s.r.o. • 25243 Průhonice • Tel. +420 267 990 211
DK ifm electronic a/s • 2605 BROENDBY • Tel. +45 70 20 11 08
E ifm electronic s.a. • 08820 El Prat de Llobregat • Tel. +34 93 479 30 80
F ifm electronic s.a. • 93192 Noisy-le-Grand Cedex • Tél. +33 0820 22 30 01
FIN ifm electronic oy • 00440 Helsinki • Tel . +358 75 329 5000
GB, IRL ifm electronic Ltd. • Hampton, Middlesex TW12 2HD • Tel. +44 208 / 213-0000
GR ifm electronic Monoprosopi E.P.E. • 15125 Amaroussio • Tel. +30 210 / 6180090
H ifm electronic kft. • 9028 Györ • Tel. +36 96 / 518-397
I ifm electronic s.a. • 20041 Agrate-Brianza (MI) • Tel. +39 039 / 68.99.982
IL Astragal Ltd. • Azur 58001 • Tel. +972 3 -559 1660
IND ifm electronic India Branch Office • Kolhapur, 416234 • Tel. +91 231-267 27 70
J efector co., ltd. • Chiba-shi, Chiba 261-7118 • Tel. +81 043-299-2070
MAL ifm electronic Pte. Ltd • 47100 Puchong Selangor • Tel. +603 8063 9522
MEX ifm efector S. de R. L. de C. V. • Monterrey, N. L. 64630 • Tel. +52 81 8040-3535
N Sivilingeniør J. F. Knudtzen A/S • 1396 Billingstad • Tel. +47 66 / 98 33 50
NL ifm electronic b.v. • 3843 GA Harderwijk • Tel. +31 341 / 438 438
P ifm electronic s.a. • 4410-136 São Félix da Marinha • Tel. +351 223 / 71 71 08
PL ifm electronic Sp. z o.o. • 40-106 Katowice • Tel. +48 32-608 74 54
RA, ROU ifm electronic s.r.l. • 1107 Buenos Aires • Tel. +54 11 / 5353 3436
ROK ifm electronic Ltd. • 140-884 Seoul • Tel. +82 2 / 790 5610
RP Gram Industrial, Inc. • 1770 Mantilupa City • Tel. +63 2 / 850 22 18
RUS ifm electronic • 105318 Moscow • Tel. +7 495 921-44-14
S ifm electronic a b • 41250 Göteborg • Tel. +46 31 / 750 23 00
SGP ifm electronic Pte. Ltd. • Singapore 609 916 • Tel. +65 6562 8661/2/3
SK ifm electronic s.r.o. • 835 54 Bratislava • Tel. +421 2 / 44 87 23 29
THA SCM Allianze Co., Ltd. • Bangkok 10 400 • Tel. +66 02 615 4888
TR ifm electronic Ltd. Sti. • 34381 Sisli/Istanbul • Tel. +90 212 / 210 50 80
UA TOV ifm electronic • 02660 Kiev • Tel. +380 44 501 8543
USA ifm efector inc. • Exton, PA 19341 • Tel. +1 610 / 5 24-2000
ZA ifm electronic (Pty) Ltd. • 0157 Pretoria • Tel. +27 12 345 44 49
Technische Änderungen behalten wir uns ohne vorherige Ankündigung vor.
We reserve the right to make technical alterations without prior notice.
Nous nous réservons le droit de modifier les données techniques sans préavis.

Ifm As-I Master AC1421

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ifm As-I Master AC1421

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ifm As-I Master AC1421

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Device Manual

5.2.6 Quick setup: Set the configuration mode .................................................................................... 51

8.2.6 Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) ..................................................................................... 131

9 Glossary of Terms 349

11 ifm weltweit • ifm worldwide • ifm à l’échelle internationale 365

Legal and copyright information ...............................................................................................................6

1.1 Legal and copyright information

1.2 Purpose of the document

1.3 Symbols and formats used

1.4 Overview: User documentation for AC14

Document Content / description

Data sheet Technical data of AC142n as a table

All documents can be downloaded from ifm's website.

1.5 Getting started

1.6 Modification history

Version Topic Date

2.0 New functions provided by firmware 3.1.2 30/11/2015

Required background knowledge ...........................................................................................................11

2.1 Required background knowledge

2.2 Please note!

2.3 Tampering with the unit

2.4 Start-up behaviour of the controller

A restart can, for example, be caused by:

Intended use ...........................................................................................................................................14

3.1 Intended use

3.1.1 Permitted use

3.1.2 Prohibited use

In the following areas you must NOT use the device:

3.2 Information concerning the device

Where is what on the AS-i device? ........................................................................................................16

3.2.1 Where is what on the AS-i device?

Status LED (H1)

Connector (X1) for

Slot for SD card

3.2.2 Operating elements

The device provides the following operating elements.

Arrow and function keys

3.2.3 Display elements

The device provides the following display elements:

3.2.4 CODESYS PLC

The device provides the following interfaces:

Ethernet configuration interface

Possible network topologies: → Configuration interface: connection concepts (→ page 133)

EtherNet/IP fieldbus interface

Technical data: → Interfaces (→ page 130)

3.2.6 Required accessories

Control of the graphical user interface ...................................................................................................20

4.1 Control of the graphical user interface

Label right function key

Right function key

Left function key

Arrow key []

Arrow key []

Arrow key []

Arrow key []

4.1.1 Function keys

The two function keys allow the operator to trigger specified

4.1.2 Arrow keys

4.2 Menu view